Details | Last modification | View Log | RSS feed
| Rev | Author | Line No. | Line |
|---|---|---|---|
| 14 | pmbaty | 1 | //===- llvm/Instructions.h - Instruction subclass definitions ---*- C++ -*-===// |
| 2 | // |
||
| 3 | // Part of the LLVM Project, under the Apache License v2.0 with LLVM Exceptions. |
||
| 4 | // See https://llvm.org/LICENSE.txt for license information. |
||
| 5 | // SPDX-License-Identifier: Apache-2.0 WITH LLVM-exception |
||
| 6 | // |
||
| 7 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 8 | // |
||
| 9 | // This file exposes the class definitions of all of the subclasses of the |
||
| 10 | // Instruction class. This is meant to be an easy way to get access to all |
||
| 11 | // instruction subclasses. |
||
| 12 | // |
||
| 13 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 14 | |||
| 15 | #ifndef LLVM_IR_INSTRUCTIONS_H |
||
| 16 | #define LLVM_IR_INSTRUCTIONS_H |
||
| 17 | |||
| 18 | #include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h" |
||
| 19 | #include "llvm/ADT/Bitfields.h" |
||
| 20 | #include "llvm/ADT/MapVector.h" |
||
| 21 | #include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h" |
||
| 22 | #include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h" |
||
| 23 | #include "llvm/ADT/Twine.h" |
||
| 24 | #include "llvm/ADT/iterator.h" |
||
| 25 | #include "llvm/ADT/iterator_range.h" |
||
| 26 | #include "llvm/IR/CFG.h" |
||
| 27 | #include "llvm/IR/Constant.h" |
||
| 28 | #include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h" |
||
| 29 | #include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h" |
||
| 30 | #include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h" |
||
| 31 | #include "llvm/IR/OperandTraits.h" |
||
| 32 | #include "llvm/IR/Use.h" |
||
| 33 | #include "llvm/IR/User.h" |
||
| 34 | #include "llvm/Support/AtomicOrdering.h" |
||
| 35 | #include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h" |
||
| 36 | #include <cassert> |
||
| 37 | #include <cstddef> |
||
| 38 | #include <cstdint> |
||
| 39 | #include <iterator> |
||
| 40 | #include <optional> |
||
| 41 | |||
| 42 | namespace llvm { |
||
| 43 | |||
| 44 | class APFloat; |
||
| 45 | class APInt; |
||
| 46 | class BasicBlock; |
||
| 47 | class ConstantInt; |
||
| 48 | class DataLayout; |
||
| 49 | class StringRef; |
||
| 50 | class Type; |
||
| 51 | class Value; |
||
| 52 | |||
| 53 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 54 | // AllocaInst Class |
||
| 55 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 56 | |||
| 57 | /// an instruction to allocate memory on the stack |
||
| 58 | class AllocaInst : public UnaryInstruction { |
||
| 59 | Type *AllocatedType; |
||
| 60 | |||
| 61 | using AlignmentField = AlignmentBitfieldElementT<0>; |
||
| 62 | using UsedWithInAllocaField = BoolBitfieldElementT<AlignmentField::NextBit>; |
||
| 63 | using SwiftErrorField = BoolBitfieldElementT<UsedWithInAllocaField::NextBit>; |
||
| 64 | static_assert(Bitfield::areContiguous<AlignmentField, UsedWithInAllocaField, |
||
| 65 | SwiftErrorField>(), |
||
| 66 | "Bitfields must be contiguous"); |
||
| 67 | |||
| 68 | protected: |
||
| 69 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 70 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 71 | |||
| 72 | AllocaInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 73 | |||
| 74 | public: |
||
| 75 | explicit AllocaInst(Type *Ty, unsigned AddrSpace, Value *ArraySize, |
||
| 76 | const Twine &Name, Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 77 | AllocaInst(Type *Ty, unsigned AddrSpace, Value *ArraySize, |
||
| 78 | const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 79 | |||
| 80 | AllocaInst(Type *Ty, unsigned AddrSpace, const Twine &Name, |
||
| 81 | Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 82 | AllocaInst(Type *Ty, unsigned AddrSpace, |
||
| 83 | const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 84 | |||
| 85 | AllocaInst(Type *Ty, unsigned AddrSpace, Value *ArraySize, Align Align, |
||
| 86 | const Twine &Name = "", Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 87 | AllocaInst(Type *Ty, unsigned AddrSpace, Value *ArraySize, Align Align, |
||
| 88 | const Twine &Name, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 89 | |||
| 90 | /// Return true if there is an allocation size parameter to the allocation |
||
| 91 | /// instruction that is not 1. |
||
| 92 | bool isArrayAllocation() const; |
||
| 93 | |||
| 94 | /// Get the number of elements allocated. For a simple allocation of a single |
||
| 95 | /// element, this will return a constant 1 value. |
||
| 96 | const Value *getArraySize() const { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 97 | Value *getArraySize() { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 98 | |||
| 99 | /// Overload to return most specific pointer type. |
||
| 100 | PointerType *getType() const { |
||
| 101 | return cast<PointerType>(Instruction::getType()); |
||
| 102 | } |
||
| 103 | |||
| 104 | /// Return the address space for the allocation. |
||
| 105 | unsigned getAddressSpace() const { |
||
| 106 | return getType()->getAddressSpace(); |
||
| 107 | } |
||
| 108 | |||
| 109 | /// Get allocation size in bytes. Returns std::nullopt if size can't be |
||
| 110 | /// determined, e.g. in case of a VLA. |
||
| 111 | std::optional<TypeSize> getAllocationSize(const DataLayout &DL) const; |
||
| 112 | |||
| 113 | /// Get allocation size in bits. Returns std::nullopt if size can't be |
||
| 114 | /// determined, e.g. in case of a VLA. |
||
| 115 | std::optional<TypeSize> getAllocationSizeInBits(const DataLayout &DL) const; |
||
| 116 | |||
| 117 | /// Return the type that is being allocated by the instruction. |
||
| 118 | Type *getAllocatedType() const { return AllocatedType; } |
||
| 119 | /// for use only in special circumstances that need to generically |
||
| 120 | /// transform a whole instruction (eg: IR linking and vectorization). |
||
| 121 | void setAllocatedType(Type *Ty) { AllocatedType = Ty; } |
||
| 122 | |||
| 123 | /// Return the alignment of the memory that is being allocated by the |
||
| 124 | /// instruction. |
||
| 125 | Align getAlign() const { |
||
| 126 | return Align(1ULL << getSubclassData<AlignmentField>()); |
||
| 127 | } |
||
| 128 | |||
| 129 | void setAlignment(Align Align) { |
||
| 130 | setSubclassData<AlignmentField>(Log2(Align)); |
||
| 131 | } |
||
| 132 | |||
| 133 | /// Return true if this alloca is in the entry block of the function and is a |
||
| 134 | /// constant size. If so, the code generator will fold it into the |
||
| 135 | /// prolog/epilog code, so it is basically free. |
||
| 136 | bool isStaticAlloca() const; |
||
| 137 | |||
| 138 | /// Return true if this alloca is used as an inalloca argument to a call. Such |
||
| 139 | /// allocas are never considered static even if they are in the entry block. |
||
| 140 | bool isUsedWithInAlloca() const { |
||
| 141 | return getSubclassData<UsedWithInAllocaField>(); |
||
| 142 | } |
||
| 143 | |||
| 144 | /// Specify whether this alloca is used to represent the arguments to a call. |
||
| 145 | void setUsedWithInAlloca(bool V) { |
||
| 146 | setSubclassData<UsedWithInAllocaField>(V); |
||
| 147 | } |
||
| 148 | |||
| 149 | /// Return true if this alloca is used as a swifterror argument to a call. |
||
| 150 | bool isSwiftError() const { return getSubclassData<SwiftErrorField>(); } |
||
| 151 | /// Specify whether this alloca is used to represent a swifterror. |
||
| 152 | void setSwiftError(bool V) { setSubclassData<SwiftErrorField>(V); } |
||
| 153 | |||
| 154 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 155 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 156 | return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Alloca); |
||
| 157 | } |
||
| 158 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 159 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 160 | } |
||
| 161 | |||
| 162 | private: |
||
| 163 | // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding |
||
| 164 | // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it. |
||
| 165 | template <typename Bitfield> |
||
| 166 | void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) { |
||
| 167 | Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value); |
||
| 168 | } |
||
| 169 | }; |
||
| 170 | |||
| 171 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 172 | // LoadInst Class |
||
| 173 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 174 | |||
| 175 | /// An instruction for reading from memory. This uses the SubclassData field in |
||
| 176 | /// Value to store whether or not the load is volatile. |
||
| 177 | class LoadInst : public UnaryInstruction { |
||
| 178 | using VolatileField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>; |
||
| 179 | using AlignmentField = AlignmentBitfieldElementT<VolatileField::NextBit>; |
||
| 180 | using OrderingField = AtomicOrderingBitfieldElementT<AlignmentField::NextBit>; |
||
| 181 | static_assert( |
||
| 182 | Bitfield::areContiguous<VolatileField, AlignmentField, OrderingField>(), |
||
| 183 | "Bitfields must be contiguous"); |
||
| 184 | |||
| 185 | void AssertOK(); |
||
| 186 | |||
| 187 | protected: |
||
| 188 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 189 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 190 | |||
| 191 | LoadInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 192 | |||
| 193 | public: |
||
| 194 | LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 195 | Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 196 | LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 197 | LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, bool isVolatile, |
||
| 198 | Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 199 | LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, bool isVolatile, |
||
| 200 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 201 | LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, bool isVolatile, |
||
| 202 | Align Align, Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 203 | LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, bool isVolatile, |
||
| 204 | Align Align, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 205 | LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, bool isVolatile, |
||
| 206 | Align Align, AtomicOrdering Order, |
||
| 207 | SyncScope::ID SSID = SyncScope::System, |
||
| 208 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 209 | LoadInst(Type *Ty, Value *Ptr, const Twine &NameStr, bool isVolatile, |
||
| 210 | Align Align, AtomicOrdering Order, SyncScope::ID SSID, |
||
| 211 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 212 | |||
| 213 | /// Return true if this is a load from a volatile memory location. |
||
| 214 | bool isVolatile() const { return getSubclassData<VolatileField>(); } |
||
| 215 | |||
| 216 | /// Specify whether this is a volatile load or not. |
||
| 217 | void setVolatile(bool V) { setSubclassData<VolatileField>(V); } |
||
| 218 | |||
| 219 | /// Return the alignment of the access that is being performed. |
||
| 220 | Align getAlign() const { |
||
| 221 | return Align(1ULL << (getSubclassData<AlignmentField>())); |
||
| 222 | } |
||
| 223 | |||
| 224 | void setAlignment(Align Align) { |
||
| 225 | setSubclassData<AlignmentField>(Log2(Align)); |
||
| 226 | } |
||
| 227 | |||
| 228 | /// Returns the ordering constraint of this load instruction. |
||
| 229 | AtomicOrdering getOrdering() const { |
||
| 230 | return getSubclassData<OrderingField>(); |
||
| 231 | } |
||
| 232 | /// Sets the ordering constraint of this load instruction. May not be Release |
||
| 233 | /// or AcquireRelease. |
||
| 234 | void setOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) { |
||
| 235 | setSubclassData<OrderingField>(Ordering); |
||
| 236 | } |
||
| 237 | |||
| 238 | /// Returns the synchronization scope ID of this load instruction. |
||
| 239 | SyncScope::ID getSyncScopeID() const { |
||
| 240 | return SSID; |
||
| 241 | } |
||
| 242 | |||
| 243 | /// Sets the synchronization scope ID of this load instruction. |
||
| 244 | void setSyncScopeID(SyncScope::ID SSID) { |
||
| 245 | this->SSID = SSID; |
||
| 246 | } |
||
| 247 | |||
| 248 | /// Sets the ordering constraint and the synchronization scope ID of this load |
||
| 249 | /// instruction. |
||
| 250 | void setAtomic(AtomicOrdering Ordering, |
||
| 251 | SyncScope::ID SSID = SyncScope::System) { |
||
| 252 | setOrdering(Ordering); |
||
| 253 | setSyncScopeID(SSID); |
||
| 254 | } |
||
| 255 | |||
| 256 | bool isSimple() const { return !isAtomic() && !isVolatile(); } |
||
| 257 | |||
| 258 | bool isUnordered() const { |
||
| 259 | return (getOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::NotAtomic || |
||
| 260 | getOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::Unordered) && |
||
| 261 | !isVolatile(); |
||
| 262 | } |
||
| 263 | |||
| 264 | Value *getPointerOperand() { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 265 | const Value *getPointerOperand() const { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 266 | static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { return 0U; } |
||
| 267 | Type *getPointerOperandType() const { return getPointerOperand()->getType(); } |
||
| 268 | |||
| 269 | /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand. |
||
| 270 | unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const { |
||
| 271 | return getPointerOperandType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); |
||
| 272 | } |
||
| 273 | |||
| 274 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 275 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 276 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Load; |
||
| 277 | } |
||
| 278 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 279 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 280 | } |
||
| 281 | |||
| 282 | private: |
||
| 283 | // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding |
||
| 284 | // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it. |
||
| 285 | template <typename Bitfield> |
||
| 286 | void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) { |
||
| 287 | Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value); |
||
| 288 | } |
||
| 289 | |||
| 290 | /// The synchronization scope ID of this load instruction. Not quite enough |
||
| 291 | /// room in SubClassData for everything, so synchronization scope ID gets its |
||
| 292 | /// own field. |
||
| 293 | SyncScope::ID SSID; |
||
| 294 | }; |
||
| 295 | |||
| 296 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 297 | // StoreInst Class |
||
| 298 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 299 | |||
| 300 | /// An instruction for storing to memory. |
||
| 301 | class StoreInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 302 | using VolatileField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>; |
||
| 303 | using AlignmentField = AlignmentBitfieldElementT<VolatileField::NextBit>; |
||
| 304 | using OrderingField = AtomicOrderingBitfieldElementT<AlignmentField::NextBit>; |
||
| 305 | static_assert( |
||
| 306 | Bitfield::areContiguous<VolatileField, AlignmentField, OrderingField>(), |
||
| 307 | "Bitfields must be contiguous"); |
||
| 308 | |||
| 309 | void AssertOK(); |
||
| 310 | |||
| 311 | protected: |
||
| 312 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 313 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 314 | |||
| 315 | StoreInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 316 | |||
| 317 | public: |
||
| 318 | StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 319 | StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 320 | StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, bool isVolatile, Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 321 | StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, bool isVolatile, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 322 | StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, bool isVolatile, Align Align, |
||
| 323 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 324 | StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, bool isVolatile, Align Align, |
||
| 325 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 326 | StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, bool isVolatile, Align Align, |
||
| 327 | AtomicOrdering Order, SyncScope::ID SSID = SyncScope::System, |
||
| 328 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 329 | StoreInst(Value *Val, Value *Ptr, bool isVolatile, Align Align, |
||
| 330 | AtomicOrdering Order, SyncScope::ID SSID, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 331 | |||
| 332 | // allocate space for exactly two operands |
||
| 333 | void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 2); } |
||
| 334 | void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); } |
||
| 335 | |||
| 336 | /// Return true if this is a store to a volatile memory location. |
||
| 337 | bool isVolatile() const { return getSubclassData<VolatileField>(); } |
||
| 338 | |||
| 339 | /// Specify whether this is a volatile store or not. |
||
| 340 | void setVolatile(bool V) { setSubclassData<VolatileField>(V); } |
||
| 341 | |||
| 342 | /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods. |
||
| 343 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 344 | |||
| 345 | Align getAlign() const { |
||
| 346 | return Align(1ULL << (getSubclassData<AlignmentField>())); |
||
| 347 | } |
||
| 348 | |||
| 349 | void setAlignment(Align Align) { |
||
| 350 | setSubclassData<AlignmentField>(Log2(Align)); |
||
| 351 | } |
||
| 352 | |||
| 353 | /// Returns the ordering constraint of this store instruction. |
||
| 354 | AtomicOrdering getOrdering() const { |
||
| 355 | return getSubclassData<OrderingField>(); |
||
| 356 | } |
||
| 357 | |||
| 358 | /// Sets the ordering constraint of this store instruction. May not be |
||
| 359 | /// Acquire or AcquireRelease. |
||
| 360 | void setOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) { |
||
| 361 | setSubclassData<OrderingField>(Ordering); |
||
| 362 | } |
||
| 363 | |||
| 364 | /// Returns the synchronization scope ID of this store instruction. |
||
| 365 | SyncScope::ID getSyncScopeID() const { |
||
| 366 | return SSID; |
||
| 367 | } |
||
| 368 | |||
| 369 | /// Sets the synchronization scope ID of this store instruction. |
||
| 370 | void setSyncScopeID(SyncScope::ID SSID) { |
||
| 371 | this->SSID = SSID; |
||
| 372 | } |
||
| 373 | |||
| 374 | /// Sets the ordering constraint and the synchronization scope ID of this |
||
| 375 | /// store instruction. |
||
| 376 | void setAtomic(AtomicOrdering Ordering, |
||
| 377 | SyncScope::ID SSID = SyncScope::System) { |
||
| 378 | setOrdering(Ordering); |
||
| 379 | setSyncScopeID(SSID); |
||
| 380 | } |
||
| 381 | |||
| 382 | bool isSimple() const { return !isAtomic() && !isVolatile(); } |
||
| 383 | |||
| 384 | bool isUnordered() const { |
||
| 385 | return (getOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::NotAtomic || |
||
| 386 | getOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::Unordered) && |
||
| 387 | !isVolatile(); |
||
| 388 | } |
||
| 389 | |||
| 390 | Value *getValueOperand() { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 391 | const Value *getValueOperand() const { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 392 | |||
| 393 | Value *getPointerOperand() { return getOperand(1); } |
||
| 394 | const Value *getPointerOperand() const { return getOperand(1); } |
||
| 395 | static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { return 1U; } |
||
| 396 | Type *getPointerOperandType() const { return getPointerOperand()->getType(); } |
||
| 397 | |||
| 398 | /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand. |
||
| 399 | unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const { |
||
| 400 | return getPointerOperandType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); |
||
| 401 | } |
||
| 402 | |||
| 403 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 404 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 405 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Store; |
||
| 406 | } |
||
| 407 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 408 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 409 | } |
||
| 410 | |||
| 411 | private: |
||
| 412 | // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding |
||
| 413 | // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it. |
||
| 414 | template <typename Bitfield> |
||
| 415 | void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) { |
||
| 416 | Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value); |
||
| 417 | } |
||
| 418 | |||
| 419 | /// The synchronization scope ID of this store instruction. Not quite enough |
||
| 420 | /// room in SubClassData for everything, so synchronization scope ID gets its |
||
| 421 | /// own field. |
||
| 422 | SyncScope::ID SSID; |
||
| 423 | }; |
||
| 424 | |||
| 425 | template <> |
||
| 426 | struct OperandTraits<StoreInst> : public FixedNumOperandTraits<StoreInst, 2> { |
||
| 427 | }; |
||
| 428 | |||
| 429 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(StoreInst, Value) |
||
| 430 | |||
| 431 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 432 | // FenceInst Class |
||
| 433 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 434 | |||
| 435 | /// An instruction for ordering other memory operations. |
||
| 436 | class FenceInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 437 | using OrderingField = AtomicOrderingBitfieldElementT<0>; |
||
| 438 | |||
| 439 | void Init(AtomicOrdering Ordering, SyncScope::ID SSID); |
||
| 440 | |||
| 441 | protected: |
||
| 442 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 443 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 444 | |||
| 445 | FenceInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 446 | |||
| 447 | public: |
||
| 448 | // Ordering may only be Acquire, Release, AcquireRelease, or |
||
| 449 | // SequentiallyConsistent. |
||
| 450 | FenceInst(LLVMContext &C, AtomicOrdering Ordering, |
||
| 451 | SyncScope::ID SSID = SyncScope::System, |
||
| 452 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 453 | FenceInst(LLVMContext &C, AtomicOrdering Ordering, SyncScope::ID SSID, |
||
| 454 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 455 | |||
| 456 | // allocate space for exactly zero operands |
||
| 457 | void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 0); } |
||
| 458 | void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); } |
||
| 459 | |||
| 460 | /// Returns the ordering constraint of this fence instruction. |
||
| 461 | AtomicOrdering getOrdering() const { |
||
| 462 | return getSubclassData<OrderingField>(); |
||
| 463 | } |
||
| 464 | |||
| 465 | /// Sets the ordering constraint of this fence instruction. May only be |
||
| 466 | /// Acquire, Release, AcquireRelease, or SequentiallyConsistent. |
||
| 467 | void setOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) { |
||
| 468 | setSubclassData<OrderingField>(Ordering); |
||
| 469 | } |
||
| 470 | |||
| 471 | /// Returns the synchronization scope ID of this fence instruction. |
||
| 472 | SyncScope::ID getSyncScopeID() const { |
||
| 473 | return SSID; |
||
| 474 | } |
||
| 475 | |||
| 476 | /// Sets the synchronization scope ID of this fence instruction. |
||
| 477 | void setSyncScopeID(SyncScope::ID SSID) { |
||
| 478 | this->SSID = SSID; |
||
| 479 | } |
||
| 480 | |||
| 481 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 482 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 483 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Fence; |
||
| 484 | } |
||
| 485 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 486 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 487 | } |
||
| 488 | |||
| 489 | private: |
||
| 490 | // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding |
||
| 491 | // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it. |
||
| 492 | template <typename Bitfield> |
||
| 493 | void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) { |
||
| 494 | Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value); |
||
| 495 | } |
||
| 496 | |||
| 497 | /// The synchronization scope ID of this fence instruction. Not quite enough |
||
| 498 | /// room in SubClassData for everything, so synchronization scope ID gets its |
||
| 499 | /// own field. |
||
| 500 | SyncScope::ID SSID; |
||
| 501 | }; |
||
| 502 | |||
| 503 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 504 | // AtomicCmpXchgInst Class |
||
| 505 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 506 | |||
| 507 | /// An instruction that atomically checks whether a |
||
| 508 | /// specified value is in a memory location, and, if it is, stores a new value |
||
| 509 | /// there. The value returned by this instruction is a pair containing the |
||
| 510 | /// original value as first element, and an i1 indicating success (true) or |
||
| 511 | /// failure (false) as second element. |
||
| 512 | /// |
||
| 513 | class AtomicCmpXchgInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 514 | void Init(Value *Ptr, Value *Cmp, Value *NewVal, Align Align, |
||
| 515 | AtomicOrdering SuccessOrdering, AtomicOrdering FailureOrdering, |
||
| 516 | SyncScope::ID SSID); |
||
| 517 | |||
| 518 | template <unsigned Offset> |
||
| 519 | using AtomicOrderingBitfieldElement = |
||
| 520 | typename Bitfield::Element<AtomicOrdering, Offset, 3, |
||
| 521 | AtomicOrdering::LAST>; |
||
| 522 | |||
| 523 | protected: |
||
| 524 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 525 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 526 | |||
| 527 | AtomicCmpXchgInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 528 | |||
| 529 | public: |
||
| 530 | AtomicCmpXchgInst(Value *Ptr, Value *Cmp, Value *NewVal, Align Alignment, |
||
| 531 | AtomicOrdering SuccessOrdering, |
||
| 532 | AtomicOrdering FailureOrdering, SyncScope::ID SSID, |
||
| 533 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 534 | AtomicCmpXchgInst(Value *Ptr, Value *Cmp, Value *NewVal, Align Alignment, |
||
| 535 | AtomicOrdering SuccessOrdering, |
||
| 536 | AtomicOrdering FailureOrdering, SyncScope::ID SSID, |
||
| 537 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 538 | |||
| 539 | // allocate space for exactly three operands |
||
| 540 | void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 3); } |
||
| 541 | void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); } |
||
| 542 | |||
| 543 | using VolatileField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>; |
||
| 544 | using WeakField = BoolBitfieldElementT<VolatileField::NextBit>; |
||
| 545 | using SuccessOrderingField = |
||
| 546 | AtomicOrderingBitfieldElementT<WeakField::NextBit>; |
||
| 547 | using FailureOrderingField = |
||
| 548 | AtomicOrderingBitfieldElementT<SuccessOrderingField::NextBit>; |
||
| 549 | using AlignmentField = |
||
| 550 | AlignmentBitfieldElementT<FailureOrderingField::NextBit>; |
||
| 551 | static_assert( |
||
| 552 | Bitfield::areContiguous<VolatileField, WeakField, SuccessOrderingField, |
||
| 553 | FailureOrderingField, AlignmentField>(), |
||
| 554 | "Bitfields must be contiguous"); |
||
| 555 | |||
| 556 | /// Return the alignment of the memory that is being allocated by the |
||
| 557 | /// instruction. |
||
| 558 | Align getAlign() const { |
||
| 559 | return Align(1ULL << getSubclassData<AlignmentField>()); |
||
| 560 | } |
||
| 561 | |||
| 562 | void setAlignment(Align Align) { |
||
| 563 | setSubclassData<AlignmentField>(Log2(Align)); |
||
| 564 | } |
||
| 565 | |||
| 566 | /// Return true if this is a cmpxchg from a volatile memory |
||
| 567 | /// location. |
||
| 568 | /// |
||
| 569 | bool isVolatile() const { return getSubclassData<VolatileField>(); } |
||
| 570 | |||
| 571 | /// Specify whether this is a volatile cmpxchg. |
||
| 572 | /// |
||
| 573 | void setVolatile(bool V) { setSubclassData<VolatileField>(V); } |
||
| 574 | |||
| 575 | /// Return true if this cmpxchg may spuriously fail. |
||
| 576 | bool isWeak() const { return getSubclassData<WeakField>(); } |
||
| 577 | |||
| 578 | void setWeak(bool IsWeak) { setSubclassData<WeakField>(IsWeak); } |
||
| 579 | |||
| 580 | /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods. |
||
| 581 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 582 | |||
| 583 | static bool isValidSuccessOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) { |
||
| 584 | return Ordering != AtomicOrdering::NotAtomic && |
||
| 585 | Ordering != AtomicOrdering::Unordered; |
||
| 586 | } |
||
| 587 | |||
| 588 | static bool isValidFailureOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) { |
||
| 589 | return Ordering != AtomicOrdering::NotAtomic && |
||
| 590 | Ordering != AtomicOrdering::Unordered && |
||
| 591 | Ordering != AtomicOrdering::AcquireRelease && |
||
| 592 | Ordering != AtomicOrdering::Release; |
||
| 593 | } |
||
| 594 | |||
| 595 | /// Returns the success ordering constraint of this cmpxchg instruction. |
||
| 596 | AtomicOrdering getSuccessOrdering() const { |
||
| 597 | return getSubclassData<SuccessOrderingField>(); |
||
| 598 | } |
||
| 599 | |||
| 600 | /// Sets the success ordering constraint of this cmpxchg instruction. |
||
| 601 | void setSuccessOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) { |
||
| 602 | assert(isValidSuccessOrdering(Ordering) && |
||
| 603 | "invalid CmpXchg success ordering"); |
||
| 604 | setSubclassData<SuccessOrderingField>(Ordering); |
||
| 605 | } |
||
| 606 | |||
| 607 | /// Returns the failure ordering constraint of this cmpxchg instruction. |
||
| 608 | AtomicOrdering getFailureOrdering() const { |
||
| 609 | return getSubclassData<FailureOrderingField>(); |
||
| 610 | } |
||
| 611 | |||
| 612 | /// Sets the failure ordering constraint of this cmpxchg instruction. |
||
| 613 | void setFailureOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) { |
||
| 614 | assert(isValidFailureOrdering(Ordering) && |
||
| 615 | "invalid CmpXchg failure ordering"); |
||
| 616 | setSubclassData<FailureOrderingField>(Ordering); |
||
| 617 | } |
||
| 618 | |||
| 619 | /// Returns a single ordering which is at least as strong as both the |
||
| 620 | /// success and failure orderings for this cmpxchg. |
||
| 621 | AtomicOrdering getMergedOrdering() const { |
||
| 622 | if (getFailureOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::SequentiallyConsistent) |
||
| 623 | return AtomicOrdering::SequentiallyConsistent; |
||
| 624 | if (getFailureOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::Acquire) { |
||
| 625 | if (getSuccessOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::Monotonic) |
||
| 626 | return AtomicOrdering::Acquire; |
||
| 627 | if (getSuccessOrdering() == AtomicOrdering::Release) |
||
| 628 | return AtomicOrdering::AcquireRelease; |
||
| 629 | } |
||
| 630 | return getSuccessOrdering(); |
||
| 631 | } |
||
| 632 | |||
| 633 | /// Returns the synchronization scope ID of this cmpxchg instruction. |
||
| 634 | SyncScope::ID getSyncScopeID() const { |
||
| 635 | return SSID; |
||
| 636 | } |
||
| 637 | |||
| 638 | /// Sets the synchronization scope ID of this cmpxchg instruction. |
||
| 639 | void setSyncScopeID(SyncScope::ID SSID) { |
||
| 640 | this->SSID = SSID; |
||
| 641 | } |
||
| 642 | |||
| 643 | Value *getPointerOperand() { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 644 | const Value *getPointerOperand() const { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 645 | static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { return 0U; } |
||
| 646 | |||
| 647 | Value *getCompareOperand() { return getOperand(1); } |
||
| 648 | const Value *getCompareOperand() const { return getOperand(1); } |
||
| 649 | |||
| 650 | Value *getNewValOperand() { return getOperand(2); } |
||
| 651 | const Value *getNewValOperand() const { return getOperand(2); } |
||
| 652 | |||
| 653 | /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand. |
||
| 654 | unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const { |
||
| 655 | return getPointerOperand()->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); |
||
| 656 | } |
||
| 657 | |||
| 658 | /// Returns the strongest permitted ordering on failure, given the |
||
| 659 | /// desired ordering on success. |
||
| 660 | /// |
||
| 661 | /// If the comparison in a cmpxchg operation fails, there is no atomic store |
||
| 662 | /// so release semantics cannot be provided. So this function drops explicit |
||
| 663 | /// Release requests from the AtomicOrdering. A SequentiallyConsistent |
||
| 664 | /// operation would remain SequentiallyConsistent. |
||
| 665 | static AtomicOrdering |
||
| 666 | getStrongestFailureOrdering(AtomicOrdering SuccessOrdering) { |
||
| 667 | switch (SuccessOrdering) { |
||
| 668 | default: |
||
| 669 | llvm_unreachable("invalid cmpxchg success ordering"); |
||
| 670 | case AtomicOrdering::Release: |
||
| 671 | case AtomicOrdering::Monotonic: |
||
| 672 | return AtomicOrdering::Monotonic; |
||
| 673 | case AtomicOrdering::AcquireRelease: |
||
| 674 | case AtomicOrdering::Acquire: |
||
| 675 | return AtomicOrdering::Acquire; |
||
| 676 | case AtomicOrdering::SequentiallyConsistent: |
||
| 677 | return AtomicOrdering::SequentiallyConsistent; |
||
| 678 | } |
||
| 679 | } |
||
| 680 | |||
| 681 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 682 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 683 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::AtomicCmpXchg; |
||
| 684 | } |
||
| 685 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 686 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 687 | } |
||
| 688 | |||
| 689 | private: |
||
| 690 | // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding |
||
| 691 | // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it. |
||
| 692 | template <typename Bitfield> |
||
| 693 | void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) { |
||
| 694 | Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value); |
||
| 695 | } |
||
| 696 | |||
| 697 | /// The synchronization scope ID of this cmpxchg instruction. Not quite |
||
| 698 | /// enough room in SubClassData for everything, so synchronization scope ID |
||
| 699 | /// gets its own field. |
||
| 700 | SyncScope::ID SSID; |
||
| 701 | }; |
||
| 702 | |||
| 703 | template <> |
||
| 704 | struct OperandTraits<AtomicCmpXchgInst> : |
||
| 705 | public FixedNumOperandTraits<AtomicCmpXchgInst, 3> { |
||
| 706 | }; |
||
| 707 | |||
| 708 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(AtomicCmpXchgInst, Value) |
||
| 709 | |||
| 710 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 711 | // AtomicRMWInst Class |
||
| 712 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 713 | |||
| 714 | /// an instruction that atomically reads a memory location, |
||
| 715 | /// combines it with another value, and then stores the result back. Returns |
||
| 716 | /// the old value. |
||
| 717 | /// |
||
| 718 | class AtomicRMWInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 719 | protected: |
||
| 720 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 721 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 722 | |||
| 723 | AtomicRMWInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 724 | |||
| 725 | public: |
||
| 726 | /// This enumeration lists the possible modifications atomicrmw can make. In |
||
| 727 | /// the descriptions, 'p' is the pointer to the instruction's memory location, |
||
| 728 | /// 'old' is the initial value of *p, and 'v' is the other value passed to the |
||
| 729 | /// instruction. These instructions always return 'old'. |
||
| 730 | enum BinOp : unsigned { |
||
| 731 | /// *p = v |
||
| 732 | Xchg, |
||
| 733 | /// *p = old + v |
||
| 734 | Add, |
||
| 735 | /// *p = old - v |
||
| 736 | Sub, |
||
| 737 | /// *p = old & v |
||
| 738 | And, |
||
| 739 | /// *p = ~(old & v) |
||
| 740 | Nand, |
||
| 741 | /// *p = old | v |
||
| 742 | Or, |
||
| 743 | /// *p = old ^ v |
||
| 744 | Xor, |
||
| 745 | /// *p = old >signed v ? old : v |
||
| 746 | Max, |
||
| 747 | /// *p = old <signed v ? old : v |
||
| 748 | Min, |
||
| 749 | /// *p = old >unsigned v ? old : v |
||
| 750 | UMax, |
||
| 751 | /// *p = old <unsigned v ? old : v |
||
| 752 | UMin, |
||
| 753 | |||
| 754 | /// *p = old + v |
||
| 755 | FAdd, |
||
| 756 | |||
| 757 | /// *p = old - v |
||
| 758 | FSub, |
||
| 759 | |||
| 760 | /// *p = maxnum(old, v) |
||
| 761 | /// \p maxnum matches the behavior of \p llvm.maxnum.*. |
||
| 762 | FMax, |
||
| 763 | |||
| 764 | /// *p = minnum(old, v) |
||
| 765 | /// \p minnum matches the behavior of \p llvm.minnum.*. |
||
| 766 | FMin, |
||
| 767 | |||
| 768 | /// Increment one up to a maximum value. |
||
| 769 | /// *p = (old u>= v) ? 0 : (old + 1) |
||
| 770 | UIncWrap, |
||
| 771 | |||
| 772 | /// Decrement one until a minimum value or zero. |
||
| 773 | /// *p = ((old == 0) || (old u> v)) ? v : (old - 1) |
||
| 774 | UDecWrap, |
||
| 775 | |||
| 776 | FIRST_BINOP = Xchg, |
||
| 777 | LAST_BINOP = UDecWrap, |
||
| 778 | BAD_BINOP |
||
| 779 | }; |
||
| 780 | |||
| 781 | private: |
||
| 782 | template <unsigned Offset> |
||
| 783 | using AtomicOrderingBitfieldElement = |
||
| 784 | typename Bitfield::Element<AtomicOrdering, Offset, 3, |
||
| 785 | AtomicOrdering::LAST>; |
||
| 786 | |||
| 787 | template <unsigned Offset> |
||
| 788 | using BinOpBitfieldElement = |
||
| 789 | typename Bitfield::Element<BinOp, Offset, 5, BinOp::LAST_BINOP>; |
||
| 790 | |||
| 791 | public: |
||
| 792 | AtomicRMWInst(BinOp Operation, Value *Ptr, Value *Val, Align Alignment, |
||
| 793 | AtomicOrdering Ordering, SyncScope::ID SSID, |
||
| 794 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 795 | AtomicRMWInst(BinOp Operation, Value *Ptr, Value *Val, Align Alignment, |
||
| 796 | AtomicOrdering Ordering, SyncScope::ID SSID, |
||
| 797 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 798 | |||
| 799 | // allocate space for exactly two operands |
||
| 800 | void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 2); } |
||
| 801 | void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); } |
||
| 802 | |||
| 803 | using VolatileField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>; |
||
| 804 | using AtomicOrderingField = |
||
| 805 | AtomicOrderingBitfieldElementT<VolatileField::NextBit>; |
||
| 806 | using OperationField = BinOpBitfieldElement<AtomicOrderingField::NextBit>; |
||
| 807 | using AlignmentField = AlignmentBitfieldElementT<OperationField::NextBit>; |
||
| 808 | static_assert(Bitfield::areContiguous<VolatileField, AtomicOrderingField, |
||
| 809 | OperationField, AlignmentField>(), |
||
| 810 | "Bitfields must be contiguous"); |
||
| 811 | |||
| 812 | BinOp getOperation() const { return getSubclassData<OperationField>(); } |
||
| 813 | |||
| 814 | static StringRef getOperationName(BinOp Op); |
||
| 815 | |||
| 816 | static bool isFPOperation(BinOp Op) { |
||
| 817 | switch (Op) { |
||
| 818 | case AtomicRMWInst::FAdd: |
||
| 819 | case AtomicRMWInst::FSub: |
||
| 820 | case AtomicRMWInst::FMax: |
||
| 821 | case AtomicRMWInst::FMin: |
||
| 822 | return true; |
||
| 823 | default: |
||
| 824 | return false; |
||
| 825 | } |
||
| 826 | } |
||
| 827 | |||
| 828 | void setOperation(BinOp Operation) { |
||
| 829 | setSubclassData<OperationField>(Operation); |
||
| 830 | } |
||
| 831 | |||
| 832 | /// Return the alignment of the memory that is being allocated by the |
||
| 833 | /// instruction. |
||
| 834 | Align getAlign() const { |
||
| 835 | return Align(1ULL << getSubclassData<AlignmentField>()); |
||
| 836 | } |
||
| 837 | |||
| 838 | void setAlignment(Align Align) { |
||
| 839 | setSubclassData<AlignmentField>(Log2(Align)); |
||
| 840 | } |
||
| 841 | |||
| 842 | /// Return true if this is a RMW on a volatile memory location. |
||
| 843 | /// |
||
| 844 | bool isVolatile() const { return getSubclassData<VolatileField>(); } |
||
| 845 | |||
| 846 | /// Specify whether this is a volatile RMW or not. |
||
| 847 | /// |
||
| 848 | void setVolatile(bool V) { setSubclassData<VolatileField>(V); } |
||
| 849 | |||
| 850 | /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods. |
||
| 851 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 852 | |||
| 853 | /// Returns the ordering constraint of this rmw instruction. |
||
| 854 | AtomicOrdering getOrdering() const { |
||
| 855 | return getSubclassData<AtomicOrderingField>(); |
||
| 856 | } |
||
| 857 | |||
| 858 | /// Sets the ordering constraint of this rmw instruction. |
||
| 859 | void setOrdering(AtomicOrdering Ordering) { |
||
| 860 | assert(Ordering != AtomicOrdering::NotAtomic && |
||
| 861 | "atomicrmw instructions can only be atomic."); |
||
| 862 | assert(Ordering != AtomicOrdering::Unordered && |
||
| 863 | "atomicrmw instructions cannot be unordered."); |
||
| 864 | setSubclassData<AtomicOrderingField>(Ordering); |
||
| 865 | } |
||
| 866 | |||
| 867 | /// Returns the synchronization scope ID of this rmw instruction. |
||
| 868 | SyncScope::ID getSyncScopeID() const { |
||
| 869 | return SSID; |
||
| 870 | } |
||
| 871 | |||
| 872 | /// Sets the synchronization scope ID of this rmw instruction. |
||
| 873 | void setSyncScopeID(SyncScope::ID SSID) { |
||
| 874 | this->SSID = SSID; |
||
| 875 | } |
||
| 876 | |||
| 877 | Value *getPointerOperand() { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 878 | const Value *getPointerOperand() const { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 879 | static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { return 0U; } |
||
| 880 | |||
| 881 | Value *getValOperand() { return getOperand(1); } |
||
| 882 | const Value *getValOperand() const { return getOperand(1); } |
||
| 883 | |||
| 884 | /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand. |
||
| 885 | unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const { |
||
| 886 | return getPointerOperand()->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); |
||
| 887 | } |
||
| 888 | |||
| 889 | bool isFloatingPointOperation() const { |
||
| 890 | return isFPOperation(getOperation()); |
||
| 891 | } |
||
| 892 | |||
| 893 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 894 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 895 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::AtomicRMW; |
||
| 896 | } |
||
| 897 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 898 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 899 | } |
||
| 900 | |||
| 901 | private: |
||
| 902 | void Init(BinOp Operation, Value *Ptr, Value *Val, Align Align, |
||
| 903 | AtomicOrdering Ordering, SyncScope::ID SSID); |
||
| 904 | |||
| 905 | // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding |
||
| 906 | // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it. |
||
| 907 | template <typename Bitfield> |
||
| 908 | void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) { |
||
| 909 | Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value); |
||
| 910 | } |
||
| 911 | |||
| 912 | /// The synchronization scope ID of this rmw instruction. Not quite enough |
||
| 913 | /// room in SubClassData for everything, so synchronization scope ID gets its |
||
| 914 | /// own field. |
||
| 915 | SyncScope::ID SSID; |
||
| 916 | }; |
||
| 917 | |||
| 918 | template <> |
||
| 919 | struct OperandTraits<AtomicRMWInst> |
||
| 920 | : public FixedNumOperandTraits<AtomicRMWInst,2> { |
||
| 921 | }; |
||
| 922 | |||
| 923 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(AtomicRMWInst, Value) |
||
| 924 | |||
| 925 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 926 | // GetElementPtrInst Class |
||
| 927 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 928 | |||
| 929 | // checkGEPType - Simple wrapper function to give a better assertion failure |
||
| 930 | // message on bad indexes for a gep instruction. |
||
| 931 | // |
||
| 932 | inline Type *checkGEPType(Type *Ty) { |
||
| 933 | assert(Ty && "Invalid GetElementPtrInst indices for type!"); |
||
| 934 | return Ty; |
||
| 935 | } |
||
| 936 | |||
| 937 | /// an instruction for type-safe pointer arithmetic to |
||
| 938 | /// access elements of arrays and structs |
||
| 939 | /// |
||
| 940 | class GetElementPtrInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 941 | Type *SourceElementType; |
||
| 942 | Type *ResultElementType; |
||
| 943 | |||
| 944 | GetElementPtrInst(const GetElementPtrInst &GEPI); |
||
| 945 | |||
| 946 | /// Constructors - Create a getelementptr instruction with a base pointer an |
||
| 947 | /// list of indices. The first ctor can optionally insert before an existing |
||
| 948 | /// instruction, the second appends the new instruction to the specified |
||
| 949 | /// BasicBlock. |
||
| 950 | inline GetElementPtrInst(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr, |
||
| 951 | ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, unsigned Values, |
||
| 952 | const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 953 | inline GetElementPtrInst(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr, |
||
| 954 | ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, unsigned Values, |
||
| 955 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 956 | |||
| 957 | void init(Value *Ptr, ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, const Twine &NameStr); |
||
| 958 | |||
| 959 | protected: |
||
| 960 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 961 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 962 | |||
| 963 | GetElementPtrInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 964 | |||
| 965 | public: |
||
| 966 | static GetElementPtrInst *Create(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr, |
||
| 967 | ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, |
||
| 968 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 969 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 970 | unsigned Values = 1 + unsigned(IdxList.size()); |
||
| 971 | assert(PointeeType && "Must specify element type"); |
||
| 972 | assert(cast<PointerType>(Ptr->getType()->getScalarType()) |
||
| 973 | ->isOpaqueOrPointeeTypeMatches(PointeeType)); |
||
| 974 | return new (Values) GetElementPtrInst(PointeeType, Ptr, IdxList, Values, |
||
| 975 | NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 976 | } |
||
| 977 | |||
| 978 | static GetElementPtrInst *Create(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr, |
||
| 979 | ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, |
||
| 980 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 981 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 982 | unsigned Values = 1 + unsigned(IdxList.size()); |
||
| 983 | assert(PointeeType && "Must specify element type"); |
||
| 984 | assert(cast<PointerType>(Ptr->getType()->getScalarType()) |
||
| 985 | ->isOpaqueOrPointeeTypeMatches(PointeeType)); |
||
| 986 | return new (Values) GetElementPtrInst(PointeeType, Ptr, IdxList, Values, |
||
| 987 | NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 988 | } |
||
| 989 | |||
| 990 | /// Create an "inbounds" getelementptr. See the documentation for the |
||
| 991 | /// "inbounds" flag in LangRef.html for details. |
||
| 992 | static GetElementPtrInst * |
||
| 993 | CreateInBounds(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr, ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, |
||
| 994 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 995 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 996 | GetElementPtrInst *GEP = |
||
| 997 | Create(PointeeType, Ptr, IdxList, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 998 | GEP->setIsInBounds(true); |
||
| 999 | return GEP; |
||
| 1000 | } |
||
| 1001 | |||
| 1002 | static GetElementPtrInst *CreateInBounds(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr, |
||
| 1003 | ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, |
||
| 1004 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1005 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1006 | GetElementPtrInst *GEP = |
||
| 1007 | Create(PointeeType, Ptr, IdxList, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1008 | GEP->setIsInBounds(true); |
||
| 1009 | return GEP; |
||
| 1010 | } |
||
| 1011 | |||
| 1012 | /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods. |
||
| 1013 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 1014 | |||
| 1015 | Type *getSourceElementType() const { return SourceElementType; } |
||
| 1016 | |||
| 1017 | void setSourceElementType(Type *Ty) { SourceElementType = Ty; } |
||
| 1018 | void setResultElementType(Type *Ty) { ResultElementType = Ty; } |
||
| 1019 | |||
| 1020 | Type *getResultElementType() const { |
||
| 1021 | assert(cast<PointerType>(getType()->getScalarType()) |
||
| 1022 | ->isOpaqueOrPointeeTypeMatches(ResultElementType)); |
||
| 1023 | return ResultElementType; |
||
| 1024 | } |
||
| 1025 | |||
| 1026 | /// Returns the address space of this instruction's pointer type. |
||
| 1027 | unsigned getAddressSpace() const { |
||
| 1028 | // Note that this is always the same as the pointer operand's address space |
||
| 1029 | // and that is cheaper to compute, so cheat here. |
||
| 1030 | return getPointerAddressSpace(); |
||
| 1031 | } |
||
| 1032 | |||
| 1033 | /// Returns the result type of a getelementptr with the given source |
||
| 1034 | /// element type and indexes. |
||
| 1035 | /// |
||
| 1036 | /// Null is returned if the indices are invalid for the specified |
||
| 1037 | /// source element type. |
||
| 1038 | static Type *getIndexedType(Type *Ty, ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList); |
||
| 1039 | static Type *getIndexedType(Type *Ty, ArrayRef<Constant *> IdxList); |
||
| 1040 | static Type *getIndexedType(Type *Ty, ArrayRef<uint64_t> IdxList); |
||
| 1041 | |||
| 1042 | /// Return the type of the element at the given index of an indexable |
||
| 1043 | /// type. This is equivalent to "getIndexedType(Agg, {Zero, Idx})". |
||
| 1044 | /// |
||
| 1045 | /// Returns null if the type can't be indexed, or the given index is not |
||
| 1046 | /// legal for the given type. |
||
| 1047 | static Type *getTypeAtIndex(Type *Ty, Value *Idx); |
||
| 1048 | static Type *getTypeAtIndex(Type *Ty, uint64_t Idx); |
||
| 1049 | |||
| 1050 | inline op_iterator idx_begin() { return op_begin()+1; } |
||
| 1051 | inline const_op_iterator idx_begin() const { return op_begin()+1; } |
||
| 1052 | inline op_iterator idx_end() { return op_end(); } |
||
| 1053 | inline const_op_iterator idx_end() const { return op_end(); } |
||
| 1054 | |||
| 1055 | inline iterator_range<op_iterator> indices() { |
||
| 1056 | return make_range(idx_begin(), idx_end()); |
||
| 1057 | } |
||
| 1058 | |||
| 1059 | inline iterator_range<const_op_iterator> indices() const { |
||
| 1060 | return make_range(idx_begin(), idx_end()); |
||
| 1061 | } |
||
| 1062 | |||
| 1063 | Value *getPointerOperand() { |
||
| 1064 | return getOperand(0); |
||
| 1065 | } |
||
| 1066 | const Value *getPointerOperand() const { |
||
| 1067 | return getOperand(0); |
||
| 1068 | } |
||
| 1069 | static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { |
||
| 1070 | return 0U; // get index for modifying correct operand. |
||
| 1071 | } |
||
| 1072 | |||
| 1073 | /// Method to return the pointer operand as a |
||
| 1074 | /// PointerType. |
||
| 1075 | Type *getPointerOperandType() const { |
||
| 1076 | return getPointerOperand()->getType(); |
||
| 1077 | } |
||
| 1078 | |||
| 1079 | /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand. |
||
| 1080 | unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const { |
||
| 1081 | return getPointerOperandType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); |
||
| 1082 | } |
||
| 1083 | |||
| 1084 | /// Returns the pointer type returned by the GEP |
||
| 1085 | /// instruction, which may be a vector of pointers. |
||
| 1086 | static Type *getGEPReturnType(Type *ElTy, Value *Ptr, |
||
| 1087 | ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList) { |
||
| 1088 | PointerType *OrigPtrTy = cast<PointerType>(Ptr->getType()->getScalarType()); |
||
| 1089 | unsigned AddrSpace = OrigPtrTy->getAddressSpace(); |
||
| 1090 | Type *ResultElemTy = checkGEPType(getIndexedType(ElTy, IdxList)); |
||
| 1091 | Type *PtrTy = OrigPtrTy->isOpaque() |
||
| 1092 | ? PointerType::get(OrigPtrTy->getContext(), AddrSpace) |
||
| 1093 | : PointerType::get(ResultElemTy, AddrSpace); |
||
| 1094 | // Vector GEP |
||
| 1095 | if (auto *PtrVTy = dyn_cast<VectorType>(Ptr->getType())) { |
||
| 1096 | ElementCount EltCount = PtrVTy->getElementCount(); |
||
| 1097 | return VectorType::get(PtrTy, EltCount); |
||
| 1098 | } |
||
| 1099 | for (Value *Index : IdxList) |
||
| 1100 | if (auto *IndexVTy = dyn_cast<VectorType>(Index->getType())) { |
||
| 1101 | ElementCount EltCount = IndexVTy->getElementCount(); |
||
| 1102 | return VectorType::get(PtrTy, EltCount); |
||
| 1103 | } |
||
| 1104 | // Scalar GEP |
||
| 1105 | return PtrTy; |
||
| 1106 | } |
||
| 1107 | |||
| 1108 | unsigned getNumIndices() const { // Note: always non-negative |
||
| 1109 | return getNumOperands() - 1; |
||
| 1110 | } |
||
| 1111 | |||
| 1112 | bool hasIndices() const { |
||
| 1113 | return getNumOperands() > 1; |
||
| 1114 | } |
||
| 1115 | |||
| 1116 | /// Return true if all of the indices of this GEP are |
||
| 1117 | /// zeros. If so, the result pointer and the first operand have the same |
||
| 1118 | /// value, just potentially different types. |
||
| 1119 | bool hasAllZeroIndices() const; |
||
| 1120 | |||
| 1121 | /// Return true if all of the indices of this GEP are |
||
| 1122 | /// constant integers. If so, the result pointer and the first operand have |
||
| 1123 | /// a constant offset between them. |
||
| 1124 | bool hasAllConstantIndices() const; |
||
| 1125 | |||
| 1126 | /// Set or clear the inbounds flag on this GEP instruction. |
||
| 1127 | /// See LangRef.html for the meaning of inbounds on a getelementptr. |
||
| 1128 | void setIsInBounds(bool b = true); |
||
| 1129 | |||
| 1130 | /// Determine whether the GEP has the inbounds flag. |
||
| 1131 | bool isInBounds() const; |
||
| 1132 | |||
| 1133 | /// Accumulate the constant address offset of this GEP if possible. |
||
| 1134 | /// |
||
| 1135 | /// This routine accepts an APInt into which it will accumulate the constant |
||
| 1136 | /// offset of this GEP if the GEP is in fact constant. If the GEP is not |
||
| 1137 | /// all-constant, it returns false and the value of the offset APInt is |
||
| 1138 | /// undefined (it is *not* preserved!). The APInt passed into this routine |
||
| 1139 | /// must be at least as wide as the IntPtr type for the address space of |
||
| 1140 | /// the base GEP pointer. |
||
| 1141 | bool accumulateConstantOffset(const DataLayout &DL, APInt &Offset) const; |
||
| 1142 | bool collectOffset(const DataLayout &DL, unsigned BitWidth, |
||
| 1143 | MapVector<Value *, APInt> &VariableOffsets, |
||
| 1144 | APInt &ConstantOffset) const; |
||
| 1145 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 1146 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 1147 | return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::GetElementPtr); |
||
| 1148 | } |
||
| 1149 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 1150 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 1151 | } |
||
| 1152 | }; |
||
| 1153 | |||
| 1154 | template <> |
||
| 1155 | struct OperandTraits<GetElementPtrInst> : |
||
| 1156 | public VariadicOperandTraits<GetElementPtrInst, 1> { |
||
| 1157 | }; |
||
| 1158 | |||
| 1159 | GetElementPtrInst::GetElementPtrInst(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr, |
||
| 1160 | ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, unsigned Values, |
||
| 1161 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1162 | Instruction *InsertBefore) |
||
| 1163 | : Instruction(getGEPReturnType(PointeeType, Ptr, IdxList), GetElementPtr, |
||
| 1164 | OperandTraits<GetElementPtrInst>::op_end(this) - Values, |
||
| 1165 | Values, InsertBefore), |
||
| 1166 | SourceElementType(PointeeType), |
||
| 1167 | ResultElementType(getIndexedType(PointeeType, IdxList)) { |
||
| 1168 | assert(cast<PointerType>(getType()->getScalarType()) |
||
| 1169 | ->isOpaqueOrPointeeTypeMatches(ResultElementType)); |
||
| 1170 | init(Ptr, IdxList, NameStr); |
||
| 1171 | } |
||
| 1172 | |||
| 1173 | GetElementPtrInst::GetElementPtrInst(Type *PointeeType, Value *Ptr, |
||
| 1174 | ArrayRef<Value *> IdxList, unsigned Values, |
||
| 1175 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1176 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) |
||
| 1177 | : Instruction(getGEPReturnType(PointeeType, Ptr, IdxList), GetElementPtr, |
||
| 1178 | OperandTraits<GetElementPtrInst>::op_end(this) - Values, |
||
| 1179 | Values, InsertAtEnd), |
||
| 1180 | SourceElementType(PointeeType), |
||
| 1181 | ResultElementType(getIndexedType(PointeeType, IdxList)) { |
||
| 1182 | assert(cast<PointerType>(getType()->getScalarType()) |
||
| 1183 | ->isOpaqueOrPointeeTypeMatches(ResultElementType)); |
||
| 1184 | init(Ptr, IdxList, NameStr); |
||
| 1185 | } |
||
| 1186 | |||
| 1187 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(GetElementPtrInst, Value) |
||
| 1188 | |||
| 1189 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 1190 | // ICmpInst Class |
||
| 1191 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 1192 | |||
| 1193 | /// This instruction compares its operands according to the predicate given |
||
| 1194 | /// to the constructor. It only operates on integers or pointers. The operands |
||
| 1195 | /// must be identical types. |
||
| 1196 | /// Represent an integer comparison operator. |
||
| 1197 | class ICmpInst: public CmpInst { |
||
| 1198 | void AssertOK() { |
||
| 1199 | assert(isIntPredicate() && |
||
| 1200 | "Invalid ICmp predicate value"); |
||
| 1201 | assert(getOperand(0)->getType() == getOperand(1)->getType() && |
||
| 1202 | "Both operands to ICmp instruction are not of the same type!"); |
||
| 1203 | // Check that the operands are the right type |
||
| 1204 | assert((getOperand(0)->getType()->isIntOrIntVectorTy() || |
||
| 1205 | getOperand(0)->getType()->isPtrOrPtrVectorTy()) && |
||
| 1206 | "Invalid operand types for ICmp instruction"); |
||
| 1207 | } |
||
| 1208 | |||
| 1209 | protected: |
||
| 1210 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 1211 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 1212 | |||
| 1213 | /// Clone an identical ICmpInst |
||
| 1214 | ICmpInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 1215 | |||
| 1216 | public: |
||
| 1217 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics. |
||
| 1218 | ICmpInst( |
||
| 1219 | Instruction *InsertBefore, ///< Where to insert |
||
| 1220 | Predicate pred, ///< The predicate to use for the comparison |
||
| 1221 | Value *LHS, ///< The left-hand-side of the expression |
||
| 1222 | Value *RHS, ///< The right-hand-side of the expression |
||
| 1223 | const Twine &NameStr = "" ///< Name of the instruction |
||
| 1224 | ) : CmpInst(makeCmpResultType(LHS->getType()), |
||
| 1225 | Instruction::ICmp, pred, LHS, RHS, NameStr, |
||
| 1226 | InsertBefore) { |
||
| 1227 | #ifndef NDEBUG |
||
| 1228 | AssertOK(); |
||
| 1229 | #endif |
||
| 1230 | } |
||
| 1231 | |||
| 1232 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end semantics. |
||
| 1233 | ICmpInst( |
||
| 1234 | BasicBlock &InsertAtEnd, ///< Block to insert into. |
||
| 1235 | Predicate pred, ///< The predicate to use for the comparison |
||
| 1236 | Value *LHS, ///< The left-hand-side of the expression |
||
| 1237 | Value *RHS, ///< The right-hand-side of the expression |
||
| 1238 | const Twine &NameStr = "" ///< Name of the instruction |
||
| 1239 | ) : CmpInst(makeCmpResultType(LHS->getType()), |
||
| 1240 | Instruction::ICmp, pred, LHS, RHS, NameStr, |
||
| 1241 | &InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1242 | #ifndef NDEBUG |
||
| 1243 | AssertOK(); |
||
| 1244 | #endif |
||
| 1245 | } |
||
| 1246 | |||
| 1247 | /// Constructor with no-insertion semantics |
||
| 1248 | ICmpInst( |
||
| 1249 | Predicate pred, ///< The predicate to use for the comparison |
||
| 1250 | Value *LHS, ///< The left-hand-side of the expression |
||
| 1251 | Value *RHS, ///< The right-hand-side of the expression |
||
| 1252 | const Twine &NameStr = "" ///< Name of the instruction |
||
| 1253 | ) : CmpInst(makeCmpResultType(LHS->getType()), |
||
| 1254 | Instruction::ICmp, pred, LHS, RHS, NameStr) { |
||
| 1255 | #ifndef NDEBUG |
||
| 1256 | AssertOK(); |
||
| 1257 | #endif |
||
| 1258 | } |
||
| 1259 | |||
| 1260 | /// For example, EQ->EQ, SLE->SLE, UGT->SGT, etc. |
||
| 1261 | /// @returns the predicate that would be the result if the operand were |
||
| 1262 | /// regarded as signed. |
||
| 1263 | /// Return the signed version of the predicate |
||
| 1264 | Predicate getSignedPredicate() const { |
||
| 1265 | return getSignedPredicate(getPredicate()); |
||
| 1266 | } |
||
| 1267 | |||
| 1268 | /// This is a static version that you can use without an instruction. |
||
| 1269 | /// Return the signed version of the predicate. |
||
| 1270 | static Predicate getSignedPredicate(Predicate pred); |
||
| 1271 | |||
| 1272 | /// For example, EQ->EQ, SLE->ULE, UGT->UGT, etc. |
||
| 1273 | /// @returns the predicate that would be the result if the operand were |
||
| 1274 | /// regarded as unsigned. |
||
| 1275 | /// Return the unsigned version of the predicate |
||
| 1276 | Predicate getUnsignedPredicate() const { |
||
| 1277 | return getUnsignedPredicate(getPredicate()); |
||
| 1278 | } |
||
| 1279 | |||
| 1280 | /// This is a static version that you can use without an instruction. |
||
| 1281 | /// Return the unsigned version of the predicate. |
||
| 1282 | static Predicate getUnsignedPredicate(Predicate pred); |
||
| 1283 | |||
| 1284 | /// Return true if this predicate is either EQ or NE. This also |
||
| 1285 | /// tests for commutativity. |
||
| 1286 | static bool isEquality(Predicate P) { |
||
| 1287 | return P == ICMP_EQ || P == ICMP_NE; |
||
| 1288 | } |
||
| 1289 | |||
| 1290 | /// Return true if this predicate is either EQ or NE. This also |
||
| 1291 | /// tests for commutativity. |
||
| 1292 | bool isEquality() const { |
||
| 1293 | return isEquality(getPredicate()); |
||
| 1294 | } |
||
| 1295 | |||
| 1296 | /// @returns true if the predicate of this ICmpInst is commutative |
||
| 1297 | /// Determine if this relation is commutative. |
||
| 1298 | bool isCommutative() const { return isEquality(); } |
||
| 1299 | |||
| 1300 | /// Return true if the predicate is relational (not EQ or NE). |
||
| 1301 | /// |
||
| 1302 | bool isRelational() const { |
||
| 1303 | return !isEquality(); |
||
| 1304 | } |
||
| 1305 | |||
| 1306 | /// Return true if the predicate is relational (not EQ or NE). |
||
| 1307 | /// |
||
| 1308 | static bool isRelational(Predicate P) { |
||
| 1309 | return !isEquality(P); |
||
| 1310 | } |
||
| 1311 | |||
| 1312 | /// Return true if the predicate is SGT or UGT. |
||
| 1313 | /// |
||
| 1314 | static bool isGT(Predicate P) { |
||
| 1315 | return P == ICMP_SGT || P == ICMP_UGT; |
||
| 1316 | } |
||
| 1317 | |||
| 1318 | /// Return true if the predicate is SLT or ULT. |
||
| 1319 | /// |
||
| 1320 | static bool isLT(Predicate P) { |
||
| 1321 | return P == ICMP_SLT || P == ICMP_ULT; |
||
| 1322 | } |
||
| 1323 | |||
| 1324 | /// Return true if the predicate is SGE or UGE. |
||
| 1325 | /// |
||
| 1326 | static bool isGE(Predicate P) { |
||
| 1327 | return P == ICMP_SGE || P == ICMP_UGE; |
||
| 1328 | } |
||
| 1329 | |||
| 1330 | /// Return true if the predicate is SLE or ULE. |
||
| 1331 | /// |
||
| 1332 | static bool isLE(Predicate P) { |
||
| 1333 | return P == ICMP_SLE || P == ICMP_ULE; |
||
| 1334 | } |
||
| 1335 | |||
| 1336 | /// Returns the sequence of all ICmp predicates. |
||
| 1337 | /// |
||
| 1338 | static auto predicates() { return ICmpPredicates(); } |
||
| 1339 | |||
| 1340 | /// Exchange the two operands to this instruction in such a way that it does |
||
| 1341 | /// not modify the semantics of the instruction. The predicate value may be |
||
| 1342 | /// changed to retain the same result if the predicate is order dependent |
||
| 1343 | /// (e.g. ult). |
||
| 1344 | /// Swap operands and adjust predicate. |
||
| 1345 | void swapOperands() { |
||
| 1346 | setPredicate(getSwappedPredicate()); |
||
| 1347 | Op<0>().swap(Op<1>()); |
||
| 1348 | } |
||
| 1349 | |||
| 1350 | /// Return result of `LHS Pred RHS` comparison. |
||
| 1351 | static bool compare(const APInt &LHS, const APInt &RHS, |
||
| 1352 | ICmpInst::Predicate Pred); |
||
| 1353 | |||
| 1354 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 1355 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 1356 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::ICmp; |
||
| 1357 | } |
||
| 1358 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 1359 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 1360 | } |
||
| 1361 | }; |
||
| 1362 | |||
| 1363 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 1364 | // FCmpInst Class |
||
| 1365 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 1366 | |||
| 1367 | /// This instruction compares its operands according to the predicate given |
||
| 1368 | /// to the constructor. It only operates on floating point values or packed |
||
| 1369 | /// vectors of floating point values. The operands must be identical types. |
||
| 1370 | /// Represents a floating point comparison operator. |
||
| 1371 | class FCmpInst: public CmpInst { |
||
| 1372 | void AssertOK() { |
||
| 1373 | assert(isFPPredicate() && "Invalid FCmp predicate value"); |
||
| 1374 | assert(getOperand(0)->getType() == getOperand(1)->getType() && |
||
| 1375 | "Both operands to FCmp instruction are not of the same type!"); |
||
| 1376 | // Check that the operands are the right type |
||
| 1377 | assert(getOperand(0)->getType()->isFPOrFPVectorTy() && |
||
| 1378 | "Invalid operand types for FCmp instruction"); |
||
| 1379 | } |
||
| 1380 | |||
| 1381 | protected: |
||
| 1382 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 1383 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 1384 | |||
| 1385 | /// Clone an identical FCmpInst |
||
| 1386 | FCmpInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 1387 | |||
| 1388 | public: |
||
| 1389 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics. |
||
| 1390 | FCmpInst( |
||
| 1391 | Instruction *InsertBefore, ///< Where to insert |
||
| 1392 | Predicate pred, ///< The predicate to use for the comparison |
||
| 1393 | Value *LHS, ///< The left-hand-side of the expression |
||
| 1394 | Value *RHS, ///< The right-hand-side of the expression |
||
| 1395 | const Twine &NameStr = "" ///< Name of the instruction |
||
| 1396 | ) : CmpInst(makeCmpResultType(LHS->getType()), |
||
| 1397 | Instruction::FCmp, pred, LHS, RHS, NameStr, |
||
| 1398 | InsertBefore) { |
||
| 1399 | AssertOK(); |
||
| 1400 | } |
||
| 1401 | |||
| 1402 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end semantics. |
||
| 1403 | FCmpInst( |
||
| 1404 | BasicBlock &InsertAtEnd, ///< Block to insert into. |
||
| 1405 | Predicate pred, ///< The predicate to use for the comparison |
||
| 1406 | Value *LHS, ///< The left-hand-side of the expression |
||
| 1407 | Value *RHS, ///< The right-hand-side of the expression |
||
| 1408 | const Twine &NameStr = "" ///< Name of the instruction |
||
| 1409 | ) : CmpInst(makeCmpResultType(LHS->getType()), |
||
| 1410 | Instruction::FCmp, pred, LHS, RHS, NameStr, |
||
| 1411 | &InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1412 | AssertOK(); |
||
| 1413 | } |
||
| 1414 | |||
| 1415 | /// Constructor with no-insertion semantics |
||
| 1416 | FCmpInst( |
||
| 1417 | Predicate Pred, ///< The predicate to use for the comparison |
||
| 1418 | Value *LHS, ///< The left-hand-side of the expression |
||
| 1419 | Value *RHS, ///< The right-hand-side of the expression |
||
| 1420 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< Name of the instruction |
||
| 1421 | Instruction *FlagsSource = nullptr |
||
| 1422 | ) : CmpInst(makeCmpResultType(LHS->getType()), Instruction::FCmp, Pred, LHS, |
||
| 1423 | RHS, NameStr, nullptr, FlagsSource) { |
||
| 1424 | AssertOK(); |
||
| 1425 | } |
||
| 1426 | |||
| 1427 | /// @returns true if the predicate of this instruction is EQ or NE. |
||
| 1428 | /// Determine if this is an equality predicate. |
||
| 1429 | static bool isEquality(Predicate Pred) { |
||
| 1430 | return Pred == FCMP_OEQ || Pred == FCMP_ONE || Pred == FCMP_UEQ || |
||
| 1431 | Pred == FCMP_UNE; |
||
| 1432 | } |
||
| 1433 | |||
| 1434 | /// @returns true if the predicate of this instruction is EQ or NE. |
||
| 1435 | /// Determine if this is an equality predicate. |
||
| 1436 | bool isEquality() const { return isEquality(getPredicate()); } |
||
| 1437 | |||
| 1438 | /// @returns true if the predicate of this instruction is commutative. |
||
| 1439 | /// Determine if this is a commutative predicate. |
||
| 1440 | bool isCommutative() const { |
||
| 1441 | return isEquality() || |
||
| 1442 | getPredicate() == FCMP_FALSE || |
||
| 1443 | getPredicate() == FCMP_TRUE || |
||
| 1444 | getPredicate() == FCMP_ORD || |
||
| 1445 | getPredicate() == FCMP_UNO; |
||
| 1446 | } |
||
| 1447 | |||
| 1448 | /// @returns true if the predicate is relational (not EQ or NE). |
||
| 1449 | /// Determine if this a relational predicate. |
||
| 1450 | bool isRelational() const { return !isEquality(); } |
||
| 1451 | |||
| 1452 | /// Exchange the two operands to this instruction in such a way that it does |
||
| 1453 | /// not modify the semantics of the instruction. The predicate value may be |
||
| 1454 | /// changed to retain the same result if the predicate is order dependent |
||
| 1455 | /// (e.g. ult). |
||
| 1456 | /// Swap operands and adjust predicate. |
||
| 1457 | void swapOperands() { |
||
| 1458 | setPredicate(getSwappedPredicate()); |
||
| 1459 | Op<0>().swap(Op<1>()); |
||
| 1460 | } |
||
| 1461 | |||
| 1462 | /// Returns the sequence of all FCmp predicates. |
||
| 1463 | /// |
||
| 1464 | static auto predicates() { return FCmpPredicates(); } |
||
| 1465 | |||
| 1466 | /// Return result of `LHS Pred RHS` comparison. |
||
| 1467 | static bool compare(const APFloat &LHS, const APFloat &RHS, |
||
| 1468 | FCmpInst::Predicate Pred); |
||
| 1469 | |||
| 1470 | /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 1471 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 1472 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::FCmp; |
||
| 1473 | } |
||
| 1474 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 1475 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 1476 | } |
||
| 1477 | }; |
||
| 1478 | |||
| 1479 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 1480 | /// This class represents a function call, abstracting a target |
||
| 1481 | /// machine's calling convention. This class uses low bit of the SubClassData |
||
| 1482 | /// field to indicate whether or not this is a tail call. The rest of the bits |
||
| 1483 | /// hold the calling convention of the call. |
||
| 1484 | /// |
||
| 1485 | class CallInst : public CallBase { |
||
| 1486 | CallInst(const CallInst &CI); |
||
| 1487 | |||
| 1488 | /// Construct a CallInst given a range of arguments. |
||
| 1489 | /// Construct a CallInst from a range of arguments |
||
| 1490 | inline CallInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1491 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1492 | Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 1493 | |||
| 1494 | inline CallInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1495 | const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore) |
||
| 1496 | : CallInst(Ty, Func, Args, std::nullopt, NameStr, InsertBefore) {} |
||
| 1497 | |||
| 1498 | /// Construct a CallInst given a range of arguments. |
||
| 1499 | /// Construct a CallInst from a range of arguments |
||
| 1500 | inline CallInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1501 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1502 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1503 | |||
| 1504 | explicit CallInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *F, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1505 | Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 1506 | |||
| 1507 | CallInst(FunctionType *ty, Value *F, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1508 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1509 | |||
| 1510 | void init(FunctionType *FTy, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1511 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr); |
||
| 1512 | void init(FunctionType *FTy, Value *Func, const Twine &NameStr); |
||
| 1513 | |||
| 1514 | /// Compute the number of operands to allocate. |
||
| 1515 | static int ComputeNumOperands(int NumArgs, int NumBundleInputs = 0) { |
||
| 1516 | // We need one operand for the called function, plus the input operand |
||
| 1517 | // counts provided. |
||
| 1518 | return 1 + NumArgs + NumBundleInputs; |
||
| 1519 | } |
||
| 1520 | |||
| 1521 | protected: |
||
| 1522 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 1523 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 1524 | |||
| 1525 | CallInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 1526 | |||
| 1527 | public: |
||
| 1528 | static CallInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *F, const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 1529 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 1530 | return new (ComputeNumOperands(0)) CallInst(Ty, F, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 1531 | } |
||
| 1532 | |||
| 1533 | static CallInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1534 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1535 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 1536 | return new (ComputeNumOperands(Args.size())) |
||
| 1537 | CallInst(Ty, Func, Args, std::nullopt, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 1538 | } |
||
| 1539 | |||
| 1540 | static CallInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1541 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = std::nullopt, |
||
| 1542 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 1543 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 1544 | const int NumOperands = |
||
| 1545 | ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), CountBundleInputs(Bundles)); |
||
| 1546 | const unsigned DescriptorBytes = Bundles.size() * sizeof(BundleOpInfo); |
||
| 1547 | |||
| 1548 | return new (NumOperands, DescriptorBytes) |
||
| 1549 | CallInst(Ty, Func, Args, Bundles, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 1550 | } |
||
| 1551 | |||
| 1552 | static CallInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *F, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1553 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1554 | return new (ComputeNumOperands(0)) CallInst(Ty, F, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1555 | } |
||
| 1556 | |||
| 1557 | static CallInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1558 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1559 | return new (ComputeNumOperands(Args.size())) |
||
| 1560 | CallInst(Ty, Func, Args, std::nullopt, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1561 | } |
||
| 1562 | |||
| 1563 | static CallInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1564 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, |
||
| 1565 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1566 | const int NumOperands = |
||
| 1567 | ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), CountBundleInputs(Bundles)); |
||
| 1568 | const unsigned DescriptorBytes = Bundles.size() * sizeof(BundleOpInfo); |
||
| 1569 | |||
| 1570 | return new (NumOperands, DescriptorBytes) |
||
| 1571 | CallInst(Ty, Func, Args, Bundles, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1572 | } |
||
| 1573 | |||
| 1574 | static CallInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 1575 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 1576 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), NameStr, |
||
| 1577 | InsertBefore); |
||
| 1578 | } |
||
| 1579 | |||
| 1580 | static CallInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1581 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = std::nullopt, |
||
| 1582 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 1583 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 1584 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), Args, Bundles, |
||
| 1585 | NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 1586 | } |
||
| 1587 | |||
| 1588 | static CallInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1589 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1590 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 1591 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), Args, NameStr, |
||
| 1592 | InsertBefore); |
||
| 1593 | } |
||
| 1594 | |||
| 1595 | static CallInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1596 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1597 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), NameStr, |
||
| 1598 | InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1599 | } |
||
| 1600 | |||
| 1601 | static CallInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1602 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1603 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), Args, NameStr, |
||
| 1604 | InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1605 | } |
||
| 1606 | |||
| 1607 | static CallInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1608 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, |
||
| 1609 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1610 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), Args, Bundles, |
||
| 1611 | NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1612 | } |
||
| 1613 | |||
| 1614 | /// Create a clone of \p CI with a different set of operand bundles and |
||
| 1615 | /// insert it before \p InsertPt. |
||
| 1616 | /// |
||
| 1617 | /// The returned call instruction is identical \p CI in every way except that |
||
| 1618 | /// the operand bundles for the new instruction are set to the operand bundles |
||
| 1619 | /// in \p Bundles. |
||
| 1620 | static CallInst *Create(CallInst *CI, ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, |
||
| 1621 | Instruction *InsertPt = nullptr); |
||
| 1622 | |||
| 1623 | /// Generate the IR for a call to malloc: |
||
| 1624 | /// 1. Compute the malloc call's argument as the specified type's size, |
||
| 1625 | /// possibly multiplied by the array size if the array size is not |
||
| 1626 | /// constant 1. |
||
| 1627 | /// 2. Call malloc with that argument. |
||
| 1628 | /// 3. Bitcast the result of the malloc call to the specified type. |
||
| 1629 | static Instruction *CreateMalloc(Instruction *InsertBefore, Type *IntPtrTy, |
||
| 1630 | Type *AllocTy, Value *AllocSize, |
||
| 1631 | Value *ArraySize = nullptr, |
||
| 1632 | Function *MallocF = nullptr, |
||
| 1633 | const Twine &Name = ""); |
||
| 1634 | static Instruction *CreateMalloc(BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd, Type *IntPtrTy, |
||
| 1635 | Type *AllocTy, Value *AllocSize, |
||
| 1636 | Value *ArraySize = nullptr, |
||
| 1637 | Function *MallocF = nullptr, |
||
| 1638 | const Twine &Name = ""); |
||
| 1639 | static Instruction * |
||
| 1640 | CreateMalloc(Instruction *InsertBefore, Type *IntPtrTy, Type *AllocTy, |
||
| 1641 | Value *AllocSize, Value *ArraySize = nullptr, |
||
| 1642 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = std::nullopt, |
||
| 1643 | Function *MallocF = nullptr, const Twine &Name = ""); |
||
| 1644 | static Instruction * |
||
| 1645 | CreateMalloc(BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd, Type *IntPtrTy, Type *AllocTy, |
||
| 1646 | Value *AllocSize, Value *ArraySize = nullptr, |
||
| 1647 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = std::nullopt, |
||
| 1648 | Function *MallocF = nullptr, const Twine &Name = ""); |
||
| 1649 | /// Generate the IR for a call to the builtin free function. |
||
| 1650 | static Instruction *CreateFree(Value *Source, Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 1651 | static Instruction *CreateFree(Value *Source, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1652 | static Instruction *CreateFree(Value *Source, |
||
| 1653 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, |
||
| 1654 | Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 1655 | static Instruction *CreateFree(Value *Source, |
||
| 1656 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, |
||
| 1657 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1658 | |||
| 1659 | // Note that 'musttail' implies 'tail'. |
||
| 1660 | enum TailCallKind : unsigned { |
||
| 1661 | TCK_None = 0, |
||
| 1662 | TCK_Tail = 1, |
||
| 1663 | TCK_MustTail = 2, |
||
| 1664 | TCK_NoTail = 3, |
||
| 1665 | TCK_LAST = TCK_NoTail |
||
| 1666 | }; |
||
| 1667 | |||
| 1668 | using TailCallKindField = Bitfield::Element<TailCallKind, 0, 2, TCK_LAST>; |
||
| 1669 | static_assert( |
||
| 1670 | Bitfield::areContiguous<TailCallKindField, CallBase::CallingConvField>(), |
||
| 1671 | "Bitfields must be contiguous"); |
||
| 1672 | |||
| 1673 | TailCallKind getTailCallKind() const { |
||
| 1674 | return getSubclassData<TailCallKindField>(); |
||
| 1675 | } |
||
| 1676 | |||
| 1677 | bool isTailCall() const { |
||
| 1678 | TailCallKind Kind = getTailCallKind(); |
||
| 1679 | return Kind == TCK_Tail || Kind == TCK_MustTail; |
||
| 1680 | } |
||
| 1681 | |||
| 1682 | bool isMustTailCall() const { return getTailCallKind() == TCK_MustTail; } |
||
| 1683 | |||
| 1684 | bool isNoTailCall() const { return getTailCallKind() == TCK_NoTail; } |
||
| 1685 | |||
| 1686 | void setTailCallKind(TailCallKind TCK) { |
||
| 1687 | setSubclassData<TailCallKindField>(TCK); |
||
| 1688 | } |
||
| 1689 | |||
| 1690 | void setTailCall(bool IsTc = true) { |
||
| 1691 | setTailCallKind(IsTc ? TCK_Tail : TCK_None); |
||
| 1692 | } |
||
| 1693 | |||
| 1694 | /// Return true if the call can return twice |
||
| 1695 | bool canReturnTwice() const { return hasFnAttr(Attribute::ReturnsTwice); } |
||
| 1696 | void setCanReturnTwice() { addFnAttr(Attribute::ReturnsTwice); } |
||
| 1697 | |||
| 1698 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 1699 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 1700 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Call; |
||
| 1701 | } |
||
| 1702 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 1703 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 1704 | } |
||
| 1705 | |||
| 1706 | /// Updates profile metadata by scaling it by \p S / \p T. |
||
| 1707 | void updateProfWeight(uint64_t S, uint64_t T); |
||
| 1708 | |||
| 1709 | private: |
||
| 1710 | // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding |
||
| 1711 | // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it. |
||
| 1712 | template <typename Bitfield> |
||
| 1713 | void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) { |
||
| 1714 | Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value); |
||
| 1715 | } |
||
| 1716 | }; |
||
| 1717 | |||
| 1718 | CallInst::CallInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1719 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1720 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) |
||
| 1721 | : CallBase(Ty->getReturnType(), Instruction::Call, |
||
| 1722 | OperandTraits<CallBase>::op_end(this) - |
||
| 1723 | (Args.size() + CountBundleInputs(Bundles) + 1), |
||
| 1724 | unsigned(Args.size() + CountBundleInputs(Bundles) + 1), |
||
| 1725 | InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1726 | init(Ty, Func, Args, Bundles, NameStr); |
||
| 1727 | } |
||
| 1728 | |||
| 1729 | CallInst::CallInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 1730 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1731 | Instruction *InsertBefore) |
||
| 1732 | : CallBase(Ty->getReturnType(), Instruction::Call, |
||
| 1733 | OperandTraits<CallBase>::op_end(this) - |
||
| 1734 | (Args.size() + CountBundleInputs(Bundles) + 1), |
||
| 1735 | unsigned(Args.size() + CountBundleInputs(Bundles) + 1), |
||
| 1736 | InsertBefore) { |
||
| 1737 | init(Ty, Func, Args, Bundles, NameStr); |
||
| 1738 | } |
||
| 1739 | |||
| 1740 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 1741 | // SelectInst Class |
||
| 1742 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 1743 | |||
| 1744 | /// This class represents the LLVM 'select' instruction. |
||
| 1745 | /// |
||
| 1746 | class SelectInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 1747 | SelectInst(Value *C, Value *S1, Value *S2, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1748 | Instruction *InsertBefore) |
||
| 1749 | : Instruction(S1->getType(), Instruction::Select, |
||
| 1750 | &Op<0>(), 3, InsertBefore) { |
||
| 1751 | init(C, S1, S2); |
||
| 1752 | setName(NameStr); |
||
| 1753 | } |
||
| 1754 | |||
| 1755 | SelectInst(Value *C, Value *S1, Value *S2, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1756 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) |
||
| 1757 | : Instruction(S1->getType(), Instruction::Select, |
||
| 1758 | &Op<0>(), 3, InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1759 | init(C, S1, S2); |
||
| 1760 | setName(NameStr); |
||
| 1761 | } |
||
| 1762 | |||
| 1763 | void init(Value *C, Value *S1, Value *S2) { |
||
| 1764 | assert(!areInvalidOperands(C, S1, S2) && "Invalid operands for select"); |
||
| 1765 | Op<0>() = C; |
||
| 1766 | Op<1>() = S1; |
||
| 1767 | Op<2>() = S2; |
||
| 1768 | } |
||
| 1769 | |||
| 1770 | protected: |
||
| 1771 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 1772 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 1773 | |||
| 1774 | SelectInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 1775 | |||
| 1776 | public: |
||
| 1777 | static SelectInst *Create(Value *C, Value *S1, Value *S2, |
||
| 1778 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 1779 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr, |
||
| 1780 | Instruction *MDFrom = nullptr) { |
||
| 1781 | SelectInst *Sel = new(3) SelectInst(C, S1, S2, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 1782 | if (MDFrom) |
||
| 1783 | Sel->copyMetadata(*MDFrom); |
||
| 1784 | return Sel; |
||
| 1785 | } |
||
| 1786 | |||
| 1787 | static SelectInst *Create(Value *C, Value *S1, Value *S2, |
||
| 1788 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1789 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1790 | return new(3) SelectInst(C, S1, S2, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1791 | } |
||
| 1792 | |||
| 1793 | const Value *getCondition() const { return Op<0>(); } |
||
| 1794 | const Value *getTrueValue() const { return Op<1>(); } |
||
| 1795 | const Value *getFalseValue() const { return Op<2>(); } |
||
| 1796 | Value *getCondition() { return Op<0>(); } |
||
| 1797 | Value *getTrueValue() { return Op<1>(); } |
||
| 1798 | Value *getFalseValue() { return Op<2>(); } |
||
| 1799 | |||
| 1800 | void setCondition(Value *V) { Op<0>() = V; } |
||
| 1801 | void setTrueValue(Value *V) { Op<1>() = V; } |
||
| 1802 | void setFalseValue(Value *V) { Op<2>() = V; } |
||
| 1803 | |||
| 1804 | /// Swap the true and false values of the select instruction. |
||
| 1805 | /// This doesn't swap prof metadata. |
||
| 1806 | void swapValues() { Op<1>().swap(Op<2>()); } |
||
| 1807 | |||
| 1808 | /// Return a string if the specified operands are invalid |
||
| 1809 | /// for a select operation, otherwise return null. |
||
| 1810 | static const char *areInvalidOperands(Value *Cond, Value *True, Value *False); |
||
| 1811 | |||
| 1812 | /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods. |
||
| 1813 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 1814 | |||
| 1815 | OtherOps getOpcode() const { |
||
| 1816 | return static_cast<OtherOps>(Instruction::getOpcode()); |
||
| 1817 | } |
||
| 1818 | |||
| 1819 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 1820 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 1821 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Select; |
||
| 1822 | } |
||
| 1823 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 1824 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 1825 | } |
||
| 1826 | }; |
||
| 1827 | |||
| 1828 | template <> |
||
| 1829 | struct OperandTraits<SelectInst> : public FixedNumOperandTraits<SelectInst, 3> { |
||
| 1830 | }; |
||
| 1831 | |||
| 1832 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(SelectInst, Value) |
||
| 1833 | |||
| 1834 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 1835 | // VAArgInst Class |
||
| 1836 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 1837 | |||
| 1838 | /// This class represents the va_arg llvm instruction, which returns |
||
| 1839 | /// an argument of the specified type given a va_list and increments that list |
||
| 1840 | /// |
||
| 1841 | class VAArgInst : public UnaryInstruction { |
||
| 1842 | protected: |
||
| 1843 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 1844 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 1845 | |||
| 1846 | VAArgInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 1847 | |||
| 1848 | public: |
||
| 1849 | VAArgInst(Value *List, Type *Ty, const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 1850 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) |
||
| 1851 | : UnaryInstruction(Ty, VAArg, List, InsertBefore) { |
||
| 1852 | setName(NameStr); |
||
| 1853 | } |
||
| 1854 | |||
| 1855 | VAArgInst(Value *List, Type *Ty, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1856 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) |
||
| 1857 | : UnaryInstruction(Ty, VAArg, List, InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1858 | setName(NameStr); |
||
| 1859 | } |
||
| 1860 | |||
| 1861 | Value *getPointerOperand() { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 1862 | const Value *getPointerOperand() const { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 1863 | static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { return 0U; } |
||
| 1864 | |||
| 1865 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 1866 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 1867 | return I->getOpcode() == VAArg; |
||
| 1868 | } |
||
| 1869 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 1870 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 1871 | } |
||
| 1872 | }; |
||
| 1873 | |||
| 1874 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 1875 | // ExtractElementInst Class |
||
| 1876 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 1877 | |||
| 1878 | /// This instruction extracts a single (scalar) |
||
| 1879 | /// element from a VectorType value |
||
| 1880 | /// |
||
| 1881 | class ExtractElementInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 1882 | ExtractElementInst(Value *Vec, Value *Idx, const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 1883 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 1884 | ExtractElementInst(Value *Vec, Value *Idx, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1885 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1886 | |||
| 1887 | protected: |
||
| 1888 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 1889 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 1890 | |||
| 1891 | ExtractElementInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 1892 | |||
| 1893 | public: |
||
| 1894 | static ExtractElementInst *Create(Value *Vec, Value *Idx, |
||
| 1895 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 1896 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 1897 | return new(2) ExtractElementInst(Vec, Idx, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 1898 | } |
||
| 1899 | |||
| 1900 | static ExtractElementInst *Create(Value *Vec, Value *Idx, |
||
| 1901 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1902 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1903 | return new(2) ExtractElementInst(Vec, Idx, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1904 | } |
||
| 1905 | |||
| 1906 | /// Return true if an extractelement instruction can be |
||
| 1907 | /// formed with the specified operands. |
||
| 1908 | static bool isValidOperands(const Value *Vec, const Value *Idx); |
||
| 1909 | |||
| 1910 | Value *getVectorOperand() { return Op<0>(); } |
||
| 1911 | Value *getIndexOperand() { return Op<1>(); } |
||
| 1912 | const Value *getVectorOperand() const { return Op<0>(); } |
||
| 1913 | const Value *getIndexOperand() const { return Op<1>(); } |
||
| 1914 | |||
| 1915 | VectorType *getVectorOperandType() const { |
||
| 1916 | return cast<VectorType>(getVectorOperand()->getType()); |
||
| 1917 | } |
||
| 1918 | |||
| 1919 | /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods. |
||
| 1920 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 1921 | |||
| 1922 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 1923 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 1924 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::ExtractElement; |
||
| 1925 | } |
||
| 1926 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 1927 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 1928 | } |
||
| 1929 | }; |
||
| 1930 | |||
| 1931 | template <> |
||
| 1932 | struct OperandTraits<ExtractElementInst> : |
||
| 1933 | public FixedNumOperandTraits<ExtractElementInst, 2> { |
||
| 1934 | }; |
||
| 1935 | |||
| 1936 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(ExtractElementInst, Value) |
||
| 1937 | |||
| 1938 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 1939 | // InsertElementInst Class |
||
| 1940 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 1941 | |||
| 1942 | /// This instruction inserts a single (scalar) |
||
| 1943 | /// element into a VectorType value |
||
| 1944 | /// |
||
| 1945 | class InsertElementInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 1946 | InsertElementInst(Value *Vec, Value *NewElt, Value *Idx, |
||
| 1947 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 1948 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 1949 | InsertElementInst(Value *Vec, Value *NewElt, Value *Idx, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1950 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1951 | |||
| 1952 | protected: |
||
| 1953 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 1954 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 1955 | |||
| 1956 | InsertElementInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 1957 | |||
| 1958 | public: |
||
| 1959 | static InsertElementInst *Create(Value *Vec, Value *NewElt, Value *Idx, |
||
| 1960 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 1961 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 1962 | return new(3) InsertElementInst(Vec, NewElt, Idx, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 1963 | } |
||
| 1964 | |||
| 1965 | static InsertElementInst *Create(Value *Vec, Value *NewElt, Value *Idx, |
||
| 1966 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 1967 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 1968 | return new(3) InsertElementInst(Vec, NewElt, Idx, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 1969 | } |
||
| 1970 | |||
| 1971 | /// Return true if an insertelement instruction can be |
||
| 1972 | /// formed with the specified operands. |
||
| 1973 | static bool isValidOperands(const Value *Vec, const Value *NewElt, |
||
| 1974 | const Value *Idx); |
||
| 1975 | |||
| 1976 | /// Overload to return most specific vector type. |
||
| 1977 | /// |
||
| 1978 | VectorType *getType() const { |
||
| 1979 | return cast<VectorType>(Instruction::getType()); |
||
| 1980 | } |
||
| 1981 | |||
| 1982 | /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods. |
||
| 1983 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 1984 | |||
| 1985 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 1986 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 1987 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::InsertElement; |
||
| 1988 | } |
||
| 1989 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 1990 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 1991 | } |
||
| 1992 | }; |
||
| 1993 | |||
| 1994 | template <> |
||
| 1995 | struct OperandTraits<InsertElementInst> : |
||
| 1996 | public FixedNumOperandTraits<InsertElementInst, 3> { |
||
| 1997 | }; |
||
| 1998 | |||
| 1999 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(InsertElementInst, Value) |
||
| 2000 | |||
| 2001 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 2002 | // ShuffleVectorInst Class |
||
| 2003 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 2004 | |||
| 2005 | constexpr int UndefMaskElem = -1; |
||
| 2006 | |||
| 2007 | /// This instruction constructs a fixed permutation of two |
||
| 2008 | /// input vectors. |
||
| 2009 | /// |
||
| 2010 | /// For each element of the result vector, the shuffle mask selects an element |
||
| 2011 | /// from one of the input vectors to copy to the result. Non-negative elements |
||
| 2012 | /// in the mask represent an index into the concatenated pair of input vectors. |
||
| 2013 | /// UndefMaskElem (-1) specifies that the result element is undefined. |
||
| 2014 | /// |
||
| 2015 | /// For scalable vectors, all the elements of the mask must be 0 or -1. This |
||
| 2016 | /// requirement may be relaxed in the future. |
||
| 2017 | class ShuffleVectorInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 2018 | SmallVector<int, 4> ShuffleMask; |
||
| 2019 | Constant *ShuffleMaskForBitcode; |
||
| 2020 | |||
| 2021 | protected: |
||
| 2022 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 2023 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 2024 | |||
| 2025 | ShuffleVectorInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 2026 | |||
| 2027 | public: |
||
| 2028 | ShuffleVectorInst(Value *V1, Value *Mask, const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 2029 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 2030 | ShuffleVectorInst(Value *V1, Value *Mask, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 2031 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 2032 | ShuffleVectorInst(Value *V1, ArrayRef<int> Mask, const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 2033 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 2034 | ShuffleVectorInst(Value *V1, ArrayRef<int> Mask, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 2035 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 2036 | ShuffleVectorInst(Value *V1, Value *V2, Value *Mask, |
||
| 2037 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 2038 | Instruction *InsertBefor = nullptr); |
||
| 2039 | ShuffleVectorInst(Value *V1, Value *V2, Value *Mask, |
||
| 2040 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 2041 | ShuffleVectorInst(Value *V1, Value *V2, ArrayRef<int> Mask, |
||
| 2042 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 2043 | Instruction *InsertBefor = nullptr); |
||
| 2044 | ShuffleVectorInst(Value *V1, Value *V2, ArrayRef<int> Mask, |
||
| 2045 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 2046 | |||
| 2047 | void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 2); } |
||
| 2048 | void operator delete(void *Ptr) { return User::operator delete(Ptr); } |
||
| 2049 | |||
| 2050 | /// Swap the operands and adjust the mask to preserve the semantics |
||
| 2051 | /// of the instruction. |
||
| 2052 | void commute(); |
||
| 2053 | |||
| 2054 | /// Return true if a shufflevector instruction can be |
||
| 2055 | /// formed with the specified operands. |
||
| 2056 | static bool isValidOperands(const Value *V1, const Value *V2, |
||
| 2057 | const Value *Mask); |
||
| 2058 | static bool isValidOperands(const Value *V1, const Value *V2, |
||
| 2059 | ArrayRef<int> Mask); |
||
| 2060 | |||
| 2061 | /// Overload to return most specific vector type. |
||
| 2062 | /// |
||
| 2063 | VectorType *getType() const { |
||
| 2064 | return cast<VectorType>(Instruction::getType()); |
||
| 2065 | } |
||
| 2066 | |||
| 2067 | /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods. |
||
| 2068 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 2069 | |||
| 2070 | /// Return the shuffle mask value of this instruction for the given element |
||
| 2071 | /// index. Return UndefMaskElem if the element is undef. |
||
| 2072 | int getMaskValue(unsigned Elt) const { return ShuffleMask[Elt]; } |
||
| 2073 | |||
| 2074 | /// Convert the input shuffle mask operand to a vector of integers. Undefined |
||
| 2075 | /// elements of the mask are returned as UndefMaskElem. |
||
| 2076 | static void getShuffleMask(const Constant *Mask, |
||
| 2077 | SmallVectorImpl<int> &Result); |
||
| 2078 | |||
| 2079 | /// Return the mask for this instruction as a vector of integers. Undefined |
||
| 2080 | /// elements of the mask are returned as UndefMaskElem. |
||
| 2081 | void getShuffleMask(SmallVectorImpl<int> &Result) const { |
||
| 2082 | Result.assign(ShuffleMask.begin(), ShuffleMask.end()); |
||
| 2083 | } |
||
| 2084 | |||
| 2085 | /// Return the mask for this instruction, for use in bitcode. |
||
| 2086 | /// |
||
| 2087 | /// TODO: This is temporary until we decide a new bitcode encoding for |
||
| 2088 | /// shufflevector. |
||
| 2089 | Constant *getShuffleMaskForBitcode() const { return ShuffleMaskForBitcode; } |
||
| 2090 | |||
| 2091 | static Constant *convertShuffleMaskForBitcode(ArrayRef<int> Mask, |
||
| 2092 | Type *ResultTy); |
||
| 2093 | |||
| 2094 | void setShuffleMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask); |
||
| 2095 | |||
| 2096 | ArrayRef<int> getShuffleMask() const { return ShuffleMask; } |
||
| 2097 | |||
| 2098 | /// Return true if this shuffle returns a vector with a different number of |
||
| 2099 | /// elements than its source vectors. |
||
| 2100 | /// Examples: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <1,2,3> |
||
| 2101 | /// shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <1,2,3,4,5> |
||
| 2102 | bool changesLength() const { |
||
| 2103 | unsigned NumSourceElts = cast<VectorType>(Op<0>()->getType()) |
||
| 2104 | ->getElementCount() |
||
| 2105 | .getKnownMinValue(); |
||
| 2106 | unsigned NumMaskElts = ShuffleMask.size(); |
||
| 2107 | return NumSourceElts != NumMaskElts; |
||
| 2108 | } |
||
| 2109 | |||
| 2110 | /// Return true if this shuffle returns a vector with a greater number of |
||
| 2111 | /// elements than its source vectors. |
||
| 2112 | /// Example: shufflevector <2 x n> A, <2 x n> B, <1,2,3> |
||
| 2113 | bool increasesLength() const { |
||
| 2114 | unsigned NumSourceElts = cast<VectorType>(Op<0>()->getType()) |
||
| 2115 | ->getElementCount() |
||
| 2116 | .getKnownMinValue(); |
||
| 2117 | unsigned NumMaskElts = ShuffleMask.size(); |
||
| 2118 | return NumSourceElts < NumMaskElts; |
||
| 2119 | } |
||
| 2120 | |||
| 2121 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask chooses elements from exactly one source |
||
| 2122 | /// vector. |
||
| 2123 | /// Example: <7,5,undef,7> |
||
| 2124 | /// This assumes that vector operands are the same length as the mask. |
||
| 2125 | static bool isSingleSourceMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask); |
||
| 2126 | static bool isSingleSourceMask(const Constant *Mask) { |
||
| 2127 | assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant."); |
||
| 2128 | SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts; |
||
| 2129 | getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2130 | return isSingleSourceMask(MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2131 | } |
||
| 2132 | |||
| 2133 | /// Return true if this shuffle chooses elements from exactly one source |
||
| 2134 | /// vector without changing the length of that vector. |
||
| 2135 | /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <3,0,undef,3> |
||
| 2136 | /// TODO: Optionally allow length-changing shuffles. |
||
| 2137 | bool isSingleSource() const { |
||
| 2138 | return !changesLength() && isSingleSourceMask(ShuffleMask); |
||
| 2139 | } |
||
| 2140 | |||
| 2141 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask chooses elements from exactly one source |
||
| 2142 | /// vector without lane crossings. A shuffle using this mask is not |
||
| 2143 | /// necessarily a no-op because it may change the number of elements from its |
||
| 2144 | /// input vectors or it may provide demanded bits knowledge via undef lanes. |
||
| 2145 | /// Example: <undef,undef,2,3> |
||
| 2146 | static bool isIdentityMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask); |
||
| 2147 | static bool isIdentityMask(const Constant *Mask) { |
||
| 2148 | assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant."); |
||
| 2149 | |||
| 2150 | // Not possible to express a shuffle mask for a scalable vector for this |
||
| 2151 | // case. |
||
| 2152 | if (isa<ScalableVectorType>(Mask->getType())) |
||
| 2153 | return false; |
||
| 2154 | |||
| 2155 | SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts; |
||
| 2156 | getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2157 | return isIdentityMask(MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2158 | } |
||
| 2159 | |||
| 2160 | /// Return true if this shuffle chooses elements from exactly one source |
||
| 2161 | /// vector without lane crossings and does not change the number of elements |
||
| 2162 | /// from its input vectors. |
||
| 2163 | /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <4,undef,6,undef> |
||
| 2164 | bool isIdentity() const { |
||
| 2165 | // Not possible to express a shuffle mask for a scalable vector for this |
||
| 2166 | // case. |
||
| 2167 | if (isa<ScalableVectorType>(getType())) |
||
| 2168 | return false; |
||
| 2169 | |||
| 2170 | return !changesLength() && isIdentityMask(ShuffleMask); |
||
| 2171 | } |
||
| 2172 | |||
| 2173 | /// Return true if this shuffle lengthens exactly one source vector with |
||
| 2174 | /// undefs in the high elements. |
||
| 2175 | bool isIdentityWithPadding() const; |
||
| 2176 | |||
| 2177 | /// Return true if this shuffle extracts the first N elements of exactly one |
||
| 2178 | /// source vector. |
||
| 2179 | bool isIdentityWithExtract() const; |
||
| 2180 | |||
| 2181 | /// Return true if this shuffle concatenates its 2 source vectors. This |
||
| 2182 | /// returns false if either input is undefined. In that case, the shuffle is |
||
| 2183 | /// is better classified as an identity with padding operation. |
||
| 2184 | bool isConcat() const; |
||
| 2185 | |||
| 2186 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask chooses elements from its source vectors |
||
| 2187 | /// without lane crossings. A shuffle using this mask would be |
||
| 2188 | /// equivalent to a vector select with a constant condition operand. |
||
| 2189 | /// Example: <4,1,6,undef> |
||
| 2190 | /// This returns false if the mask does not choose from both input vectors. |
||
| 2191 | /// In that case, the shuffle is better classified as an identity shuffle. |
||
| 2192 | /// This assumes that vector operands are the same length as the mask |
||
| 2193 | /// (a length-changing shuffle can never be equivalent to a vector select). |
||
| 2194 | static bool isSelectMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask); |
||
| 2195 | static bool isSelectMask(const Constant *Mask) { |
||
| 2196 | assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant."); |
||
| 2197 | SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts; |
||
| 2198 | getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2199 | return isSelectMask(MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2200 | } |
||
| 2201 | |||
| 2202 | /// Return true if this shuffle chooses elements from its source vectors |
||
| 2203 | /// without lane crossings and all operands have the same number of elements. |
||
| 2204 | /// In other words, this shuffle is equivalent to a vector select with a |
||
| 2205 | /// constant condition operand. |
||
| 2206 | /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <undef,1,6,3> |
||
| 2207 | /// This returns false if the mask does not choose from both input vectors. |
||
| 2208 | /// In that case, the shuffle is better classified as an identity shuffle. |
||
| 2209 | /// TODO: Optionally allow length-changing shuffles. |
||
| 2210 | bool isSelect() const { |
||
| 2211 | return !changesLength() && isSelectMask(ShuffleMask); |
||
| 2212 | } |
||
| 2213 | |||
| 2214 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask swaps the order of elements from exactly |
||
| 2215 | /// one source vector. |
||
| 2216 | /// Example: <7,6,undef,4> |
||
| 2217 | /// This assumes that vector operands are the same length as the mask. |
||
| 2218 | static bool isReverseMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask); |
||
| 2219 | static bool isReverseMask(const Constant *Mask) { |
||
| 2220 | assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant."); |
||
| 2221 | SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts; |
||
| 2222 | getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2223 | return isReverseMask(MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2224 | } |
||
| 2225 | |||
| 2226 | /// Return true if this shuffle swaps the order of elements from exactly |
||
| 2227 | /// one source vector. |
||
| 2228 | /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <3,undef,1,undef> |
||
| 2229 | /// TODO: Optionally allow length-changing shuffles. |
||
| 2230 | bool isReverse() const { |
||
| 2231 | return !changesLength() && isReverseMask(ShuffleMask); |
||
| 2232 | } |
||
| 2233 | |||
| 2234 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask chooses all elements with the same value |
||
| 2235 | /// as the first element of exactly one source vector. |
||
| 2236 | /// Example: <4,undef,undef,4> |
||
| 2237 | /// This assumes that vector operands are the same length as the mask. |
||
| 2238 | static bool isZeroEltSplatMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask); |
||
| 2239 | static bool isZeroEltSplatMask(const Constant *Mask) { |
||
| 2240 | assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant."); |
||
| 2241 | SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts; |
||
| 2242 | getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2243 | return isZeroEltSplatMask(MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2244 | } |
||
| 2245 | |||
| 2246 | /// Return true if all elements of this shuffle are the same value as the |
||
| 2247 | /// first element of exactly one source vector without changing the length |
||
| 2248 | /// of that vector. |
||
| 2249 | /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <undef,0,undef,0> |
||
| 2250 | /// TODO: Optionally allow length-changing shuffles. |
||
| 2251 | /// TODO: Optionally allow splats from other elements. |
||
| 2252 | bool isZeroEltSplat() const { |
||
| 2253 | return !changesLength() && isZeroEltSplatMask(ShuffleMask); |
||
| 2254 | } |
||
| 2255 | |||
| 2256 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask is a transpose mask. |
||
| 2257 | /// Transpose vector masks transpose a 2xn matrix. They read corresponding |
||
| 2258 | /// even- or odd-numbered vector elements from two n-dimensional source |
||
| 2259 | /// vectors and write each result into consecutive elements of an |
||
| 2260 | /// n-dimensional destination vector. Two shuffles are necessary to complete |
||
| 2261 | /// the transpose, one for the even elements and another for the odd elements. |
||
| 2262 | /// This description closely follows how the TRN1 and TRN2 AArch64 |
||
| 2263 | /// instructions operate. |
||
| 2264 | /// |
||
| 2265 | /// For example, a simple 2x2 matrix can be transposed with: |
||
| 2266 | /// |
||
| 2267 | /// ; Original matrix |
||
| 2268 | /// m0 = < a, b > |
||
| 2269 | /// m1 = < c, d > |
||
| 2270 | /// |
||
| 2271 | /// ; Transposed matrix |
||
| 2272 | /// t0 = < a, c > = shufflevector m0, m1, < 0, 2 > |
||
| 2273 | /// t1 = < b, d > = shufflevector m0, m1, < 1, 3 > |
||
| 2274 | /// |
||
| 2275 | /// For matrices having greater than n columns, the resulting nx2 transposed |
||
| 2276 | /// matrix is stored in two result vectors such that one vector contains |
||
| 2277 | /// interleaved elements from all the even-numbered rows and the other vector |
||
| 2278 | /// contains interleaved elements from all the odd-numbered rows. For example, |
||
| 2279 | /// a 2x4 matrix can be transposed with: |
||
| 2280 | /// |
||
| 2281 | /// ; Original matrix |
||
| 2282 | /// m0 = < a, b, c, d > |
||
| 2283 | /// m1 = < e, f, g, h > |
||
| 2284 | /// |
||
| 2285 | /// ; Transposed matrix |
||
| 2286 | /// t0 = < a, e, c, g > = shufflevector m0, m1 < 0, 4, 2, 6 > |
||
| 2287 | /// t1 = < b, f, d, h > = shufflevector m0, m1 < 1, 5, 3, 7 > |
||
| 2288 | static bool isTransposeMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask); |
||
| 2289 | static bool isTransposeMask(const Constant *Mask) { |
||
| 2290 | assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant."); |
||
| 2291 | SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts; |
||
| 2292 | getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2293 | return isTransposeMask(MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2294 | } |
||
| 2295 | |||
| 2296 | /// Return true if this shuffle transposes the elements of its inputs without |
||
| 2297 | /// changing the length of the vectors. This operation may also be known as a |
||
| 2298 | /// merge or interleave. See the description for isTransposeMask() for the |
||
| 2299 | /// exact specification. |
||
| 2300 | /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <0,4,2,6> |
||
| 2301 | bool isTranspose() const { |
||
| 2302 | return !changesLength() && isTransposeMask(ShuffleMask); |
||
| 2303 | } |
||
| 2304 | |||
| 2305 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask is a splice mask, concatenating the two |
||
| 2306 | /// inputs together and then extracts an original width vector starting from |
||
| 2307 | /// the splice index. |
||
| 2308 | /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <1,2,3,4> |
||
| 2309 | static bool isSpliceMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask, int &Index); |
||
| 2310 | static bool isSpliceMask(const Constant *Mask, int &Index) { |
||
| 2311 | assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant."); |
||
| 2312 | SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts; |
||
| 2313 | getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2314 | return isSpliceMask(MaskAsInts, Index); |
||
| 2315 | } |
||
| 2316 | |||
| 2317 | /// Return true if this shuffle splices two inputs without changing the length |
||
| 2318 | /// of the vectors. This operation concatenates the two inputs together and |
||
| 2319 | /// then extracts an original width vector starting from the splice index. |
||
| 2320 | /// Example: shufflevector <4 x n> A, <4 x n> B, <1,2,3,4> |
||
| 2321 | bool isSplice(int &Index) const { |
||
| 2322 | return !changesLength() && isSpliceMask(ShuffleMask, Index); |
||
| 2323 | } |
||
| 2324 | |||
| 2325 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask is an extract subvector mask. |
||
| 2326 | /// A valid extract subvector mask returns a smaller vector from a single |
||
| 2327 | /// source operand. The base extraction index is returned as well. |
||
| 2328 | static bool isExtractSubvectorMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask, int NumSrcElts, |
||
| 2329 | int &Index); |
||
| 2330 | static bool isExtractSubvectorMask(const Constant *Mask, int NumSrcElts, |
||
| 2331 | int &Index) { |
||
| 2332 | assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant."); |
||
| 2333 | // Not possible to express a shuffle mask for a scalable vector for this |
||
| 2334 | // case. |
||
| 2335 | if (isa<ScalableVectorType>(Mask->getType())) |
||
| 2336 | return false; |
||
| 2337 | SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts; |
||
| 2338 | getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2339 | return isExtractSubvectorMask(MaskAsInts, NumSrcElts, Index); |
||
| 2340 | } |
||
| 2341 | |||
| 2342 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask is an extract subvector mask. |
||
| 2343 | bool isExtractSubvectorMask(int &Index) const { |
||
| 2344 | // Not possible to express a shuffle mask for a scalable vector for this |
||
| 2345 | // case. |
||
| 2346 | if (isa<ScalableVectorType>(getType())) |
||
| 2347 | return false; |
||
| 2348 | |||
| 2349 | int NumSrcElts = |
||
| 2350 | cast<FixedVectorType>(Op<0>()->getType())->getNumElements(); |
||
| 2351 | return isExtractSubvectorMask(ShuffleMask, NumSrcElts, Index); |
||
| 2352 | } |
||
| 2353 | |||
| 2354 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask is an insert subvector mask. |
||
| 2355 | /// A valid insert subvector mask inserts the lowest elements of a second |
||
| 2356 | /// source operand into an in-place first source operand operand. |
||
| 2357 | /// Both the sub vector width and the insertion index is returned. |
||
| 2358 | static bool isInsertSubvectorMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask, int NumSrcElts, |
||
| 2359 | int &NumSubElts, int &Index); |
||
| 2360 | static bool isInsertSubvectorMask(const Constant *Mask, int NumSrcElts, |
||
| 2361 | int &NumSubElts, int &Index) { |
||
| 2362 | assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant."); |
||
| 2363 | // Not possible to express a shuffle mask for a scalable vector for this |
||
| 2364 | // case. |
||
| 2365 | if (isa<ScalableVectorType>(Mask->getType())) |
||
| 2366 | return false; |
||
| 2367 | SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts; |
||
| 2368 | getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2369 | return isInsertSubvectorMask(MaskAsInts, NumSrcElts, NumSubElts, Index); |
||
| 2370 | } |
||
| 2371 | |||
| 2372 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask is an insert subvector mask. |
||
| 2373 | bool isInsertSubvectorMask(int &NumSubElts, int &Index) const { |
||
| 2374 | // Not possible to express a shuffle mask for a scalable vector for this |
||
| 2375 | // case. |
||
| 2376 | if (isa<ScalableVectorType>(getType())) |
||
| 2377 | return false; |
||
| 2378 | |||
| 2379 | int NumSrcElts = |
||
| 2380 | cast<FixedVectorType>(Op<0>()->getType())->getNumElements(); |
||
| 2381 | return isInsertSubvectorMask(ShuffleMask, NumSrcElts, NumSubElts, Index); |
||
| 2382 | } |
||
| 2383 | |||
| 2384 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask replicates each of the \p VF elements |
||
| 2385 | /// in a vector \p ReplicationFactor times. |
||
| 2386 | /// For example, the mask for \p ReplicationFactor=3 and \p VF=4 is: |
||
| 2387 | /// <0,0,0,1,1,1,2,2,2,3,3,3> |
||
| 2388 | static bool isReplicationMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask, int &ReplicationFactor, |
||
| 2389 | int &VF); |
||
| 2390 | static bool isReplicationMask(const Constant *Mask, int &ReplicationFactor, |
||
| 2391 | int &VF) { |
||
| 2392 | assert(Mask->getType()->isVectorTy() && "Shuffle needs vector constant."); |
||
| 2393 | // Not possible to express a shuffle mask for a scalable vector for this |
||
| 2394 | // case. |
||
| 2395 | if (isa<ScalableVectorType>(Mask->getType())) |
||
| 2396 | return false; |
||
| 2397 | SmallVector<int, 16> MaskAsInts; |
||
| 2398 | getShuffleMask(Mask, MaskAsInts); |
||
| 2399 | return isReplicationMask(MaskAsInts, ReplicationFactor, VF); |
||
| 2400 | } |
||
| 2401 | |||
| 2402 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask is a replication mask. |
||
| 2403 | bool isReplicationMask(int &ReplicationFactor, int &VF) const; |
||
| 2404 | |||
| 2405 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask represents "clustered" mask of size VF, |
||
| 2406 | /// i.e. each index between [0..VF) is used exactly once in each submask of |
||
| 2407 | /// size VF. |
||
| 2408 | /// For example, the mask for \p VF=4 is: |
||
| 2409 | /// 0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 0, 1 - "clustered", because each submask of size 4 |
||
| 2410 | /// (0,1,2,3 and 3,2,0,1) uses indices [0..VF) exactly one time. |
||
| 2411 | /// 0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 3, 1, 0 - not "clustered", because |
||
| 2412 | /// element 3 is used twice in the second submask |
||
| 2413 | /// (3,3,1,0) and index 2 is not used at all. |
||
| 2414 | static bool isOneUseSingleSourceMask(ArrayRef<int> Mask, int VF); |
||
| 2415 | |||
| 2416 | /// Return true if this shuffle mask is a one-use-single-source("clustered") |
||
| 2417 | /// mask. |
||
| 2418 | bool isOneUseSingleSourceMask(int VF) const; |
||
| 2419 | |||
| 2420 | /// Change values in a shuffle permute mask assuming the two vector operands |
||
| 2421 | /// of length InVecNumElts have swapped position. |
||
| 2422 | static void commuteShuffleMask(MutableArrayRef<int> Mask, |
||
| 2423 | unsigned InVecNumElts) { |
||
| 2424 | for (int &Idx : Mask) { |
||
| 2425 | if (Idx == -1) |
||
| 2426 | continue; |
||
| 2427 | Idx = Idx < (int)InVecNumElts ? Idx + InVecNumElts : Idx - InVecNumElts; |
||
| 2428 | assert(Idx >= 0 && Idx < (int)InVecNumElts * 2 && |
||
| 2429 | "shufflevector mask index out of range"); |
||
| 2430 | } |
||
| 2431 | } |
||
| 2432 | |||
| 2433 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 2434 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 2435 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::ShuffleVector; |
||
| 2436 | } |
||
| 2437 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 2438 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 2439 | } |
||
| 2440 | }; |
||
| 2441 | |||
| 2442 | template <> |
||
| 2443 | struct OperandTraits<ShuffleVectorInst> |
||
| 2444 | : public FixedNumOperandTraits<ShuffleVectorInst, 2> {}; |
||
| 2445 | |||
| 2446 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(ShuffleVectorInst, Value) |
||
| 2447 | |||
| 2448 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 2449 | // ExtractValueInst Class |
||
| 2450 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 2451 | |||
| 2452 | /// This instruction extracts a struct member or array |
||
| 2453 | /// element value from an aggregate value. |
||
| 2454 | /// |
||
| 2455 | class ExtractValueInst : public UnaryInstruction { |
||
| 2456 | SmallVector<unsigned, 4> Indices; |
||
| 2457 | |||
| 2458 | ExtractValueInst(const ExtractValueInst &EVI); |
||
| 2459 | |||
| 2460 | /// Constructors - Create a extractvalue instruction with a base aggregate |
||
| 2461 | /// value and a list of indices. The first ctor can optionally insert before |
||
| 2462 | /// an existing instruction, the second appends the new instruction to the |
||
| 2463 | /// specified BasicBlock. |
||
| 2464 | inline ExtractValueInst(Value *Agg, |
||
| 2465 | ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, |
||
| 2466 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 2467 | Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 2468 | inline ExtractValueInst(Value *Agg, |
||
| 2469 | ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, |
||
| 2470 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 2471 | |||
| 2472 | void init(ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, const Twine &NameStr); |
||
| 2473 | |||
| 2474 | protected: |
||
| 2475 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 2476 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 2477 | |||
| 2478 | ExtractValueInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 2479 | |||
| 2480 | public: |
||
| 2481 | static ExtractValueInst *Create(Value *Agg, |
||
| 2482 | ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, |
||
| 2483 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 2484 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 2485 | return new |
||
| 2486 | ExtractValueInst(Agg, Idxs, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 2487 | } |
||
| 2488 | |||
| 2489 | static ExtractValueInst *Create(Value *Agg, |
||
| 2490 | ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, |
||
| 2491 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 2492 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 2493 | return new ExtractValueInst(Agg, Idxs, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 2494 | } |
||
| 2495 | |||
| 2496 | /// Returns the type of the element that would be extracted |
||
| 2497 | /// with an extractvalue instruction with the specified parameters. |
||
| 2498 | /// |
||
| 2499 | /// Null is returned if the indices are invalid for the specified type. |
||
| 2500 | static Type *getIndexedType(Type *Agg, ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs); |
||
| 2501 | |||
| 2502 | using idx_iterator = const unsigned*; |
||
| 2503 | |||
| 2504 | inline idx_iterator idx_begin() const { return Indices.begin(); } |
||
| 2505 | inline idx_iterator idx_end() const { return Indices.end(); } |
||
| 2506 | inline iterator_range<idx_iterator> indices() const { |
||
| 2507 | return make_range(idx_begin(), idx_end()); |
||
| 2508 | } |
||
| 2509 | |||
| 2510 | Value *getAggregateOperand() { |
||
| 2511 | return getOperand(0); |
||
| 2512 | } |
||
| 2513 | const Value *getAggregateOperand() const { |
||
| 2514 | return getOperand(0); |
||
| 2515 | } |
||
| 2516 | static unsigned getAggregateOperandIndex() { |
||
| 2517 | return 0U; // get index for modifying correct operand |
||
| 2518 | } |
||
| 2519 | |||
| 2520 | ArrayRef<unsigned> getIndices() const { |
||
| 2521 | return Indices; |
||
| 2522 | } |
||
| 2523 | |||
| 2524 | unsigned getNumIndices() const { |
||
| 2525 | return (unsigned)Indices.size(); |
||
| 2526 | } |
||
| 2527 | |||
| 2528 | bool hasIndices() const { |
||
| 2529 | return true; |
||
| 2530 | } |
||
| 2531 | |||
| 2532 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 2533 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 2534 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::ExtractValue; |
||
| 2535 | } |
||
| 2536 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 2537 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 2538 | } |
||
| 2539 | }; |
||
| 2540 | |||
| 2541 | ExtractValueInst::ExtractValueInst(Value *Agg, |
||
| 2542 | ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, |
||
| 2543 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 2544 | Instruction *InsertBefore) |
||
| 2545 | : UnaryInstruction(checkGEPType(getIndexedType(Agg->getType(), Idxs)), |
||
| 2546 | ExtractValue, Agg, InsertBefore) { |
||
| 2547 | init(Idxs, NameStr); |
||
| 2548 | } |
||
| 2549 | |||
| 2550 | ExtractValueInst::ExtractValueInst(Value *Agg, |
||
| 2551 | ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, |
||
| 2552 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 2553 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) |
||
| 2554 | : UnaryInstruction(checkGEPType(getIndexedType(Agg->getType(), Idxs)), |
||
| 2555 | ExtractValue, Agg, InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 2556 | init(Idxs, NameStr); |
||
| 2557 | } |
||
| 2558 | |||
| 2559 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 2560 | // InsertValueInst Class |
||
| 2561 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 2562 | |||
| 2563 | /// This instruction inserts a struct field of array element |
||
| 2564 | /// value into an aggregate value. |
||
| 2565 | /// |
||
| 2566 | class InsertValueInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 2567 | SmallVector<unsigned, 4> Indices; |
||
| 2568 | |||
| 2569 | InsertValueInst(const InsertValueInst &IVI); |
||
| 2570 | |||
| 2571 | /// Constructors - Create a insertvalue instruction with a base aggregate |
||
| 2572 | /// value, a value to insert, and a list of indices. The first ctor can |
||
| 2573 | /// optionally insert before an existing instruction, the second appends |
||
| 2574 | /// the new instruction to the specified BasicBlock. |
||
| 2575 | inline InsertValueInst(Value *Agg, Value *Val, |
||
| 2576 | ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, |
||
| 2577 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 2578 | Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 2579 | inline InsertValueInst(Value *Agg, Value *Val, |
||
| 2580 | ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, |
||
| 2581 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 2582 | |||
| 2583 | /// Constructors - These two constructors are convenience methods because one |
||
| 2584 | /// and two index insertvalue instructions are so common. |
||
| 2585 | InsertValueInst(Value *Agg, Value *Val, unsigned Idx, |
||
| 2586 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 2587 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 2588 | InsertValueInst(Value *Agg, Value *Val, unsigned Idx, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 2589 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 2590 | |||
| 2591 | void init(Value *Agg, Value *Val, ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, |
||
| 2592 | const Twine &NameStr); |
||
| 2593 | |||
| 2594 | protected: |
||
| 2595 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 2596 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 2597 | |||
| 2598 | InsertValueInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 2599 | |||
| 2600 | public: |
||
| 2601 | // allocate space for exactly two operands |
||
| 2602 | void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 2); } |
||
| 2603 | void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); } |
||
| 2604 | |||
| 2605 | static InsertValueInst *Create(Value *Agg, Value *Val, |
||
| 2606 | ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, |
||
| 2607 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 2608 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 2609 | return new InsertValueInst(Agg, Val, Idxs, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 2610 | } |
||
| 2611 | |||
| 2612 | static InsertValueInst *Create(Value *Agg, Value *Val, |
||
| 2613 | ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, |
||
| 2614 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 2615 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 2616 | return new InsertValueInst(Agg, Val, Idxs, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 2617 | } |
||
| 2618 | |||
| 2619 | /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods. |
||
| 2620 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 2621 | |||
| 2622 | using idx_iterator = const unsigned*; |
||
| 2623 | |||
| 2624 | inline idx_iterator idx_begin() const { return Indices.begin(); } |
||
| 2625 | inline idx_iterator idx_end() const { return Indices.end(); } |
||
| 2626 | inline iterator_range<idx_iterator> indices() const { |
||
| 2627 | return make_range(idx_begin(), idx_end()); |
||
| 2628 | } |
||
| 2629 | |||
| 2630 | Value *getAggregateOperand() { |
||
| 2631 | return getOperand(0); |
||
| 2632 | } |
||
| 2633 | const Value *getAggregateOperand() const { |
||
| 2634 | return getOperand(0); |
||
| 2635 | } |
||
| 2636 | static unsigned getAggregateOperandIndex() { |
||
| 2637 | return 0U; // get index for modifying correct operand |
||
| 2638 | } |
||
| 2639 | |||
| 2640 | Value *getInsertedValueOperand() { |
||
| 2641 | return getOperand(1); |
||
| 2642 | } |
||
| 2643 | const Value *getInsertedValueOperand() const { |
||
| 2644 | return getOperand(1); |
||
| 2645 | } |
||
| 2646 | static unsigned getInsertedValueOperandIndex() { |
||
| 2647 | return 1U; // get index for modifying correct operand |
||
| 2648 | } |
||
| 2649 | |||
| 2650 | ArrayRef<unsigned> getIndices() const { |
||
| 2651 | return Indices; |
||
| 2652 | } |
||
| 2653 | |||
| 2654 | unsigned getNumIndices() const { |
||
| 2655 | return (unsigned)Indices.size(); |
||
| 2656 | } |
||
| 2657 | |||
| 2658 | bool hasIndices() const { |
||
| 2659 | return true; |
||
| 2660 | } |
||
| 2661 | |||
| 2662 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 2663 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 2664 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::InsertValue; |
||
| 2665 | } |
||
| 2666 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 2667 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 2668 | } |
||
| 2669 | }; |
||
| 2670 | |||
| 2671 | template <> |
||
| 2672 | struct OperandTraits<InsertValueInst> : |
||
| 2673 | public FixedNumOperandTraits<InsertValueInst, 2> { |
||
| 2674 | }; |
||
| 2675 | |||
| 2676 | InsertValueInst::InsertValueInst(Value *Agg, |
||
| 2677 | Value *Val, |
||
| 2678 | ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, |
||
| 2679 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 2680 | Instruction *InsertBefore) |
||
| 2681 | : Instruction(Agg->getType(), InsertValue, |
||
| 2682 | OperandTraits<InsertValueInst>::op_begin(this), |
||
| 2683 | 2, InsertBefore) { |
||
| 2684 | init(Agg, Val, Idxs, NameStr); |
||
| 2685 | } |
||
| 2686 | |||
| 2687 | InsertValueInst::InsertValueInst(Value *Agg, |
||
| 2688 | Value *Val, |
||
| 2689 | ArrayRef<unsigned> Idxs, |
||
| 2690 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 2691 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) |
||
| 2692 | : Instruction(Agg->getType(), InsertValue, |
||
| 2693 | OperandTraits<InsertValueInst>::op_begin(this), |
||
| 2694 | 2, InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 2695 | init(Agg, Val, Idxs, NameStr); |
||
| 2696 | } |
||
| 2697 | |||
| 2698 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(InsertValueInst, Value) |
||
| 2699 | |||
| 2700 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 2701 | // PHINode Class |
||
| 2702 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 2703 | |||
| 2704 | // PHINode - The PHINode class is used to represent the magical mystical PHI |
||
| 2705 | // node, that can not exist in nature, but can be synthesized in a computer |
||
| 2706 | // scientist's overactive imagination. |
||
| 2707 | // |
||
| 2708 | class PHINode : public Instruction { |
||
| 2709 | /// The number of operands actually allocated. NumOperands is |
||
| 2710 | /// the number actually in use. |
||
| 2711 | unsigned ReservedSpace; |
||
| 2712 | |||
| 2713 | PHINode(const PHINode &PN); |
||
| 2714 | |||
| 2715 | explicit PHINode(Type *Ty, unsigned NumReservedValues, |
||
| 2716 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 2717 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) |
||
| 2718 | : Instruction(Ty, Instruction::PHI, nullptr, 0, InsertBefore), |
||
| 2719 | ReservedSpace(NumReservedValues) { |
||
| 2720 | assert(!Ty->isTokenTy() && "PHI nodes cannot have token type!"); |
||
| 2721 | setName(NameStr); |
||
| 2722 | allocHungoffUses(ReservedSpace); |
||
| 2723 | } |
||
| 2724 | |||
| 2725 | PHINode(Type *Ty, unsigned NumReservedValues, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 2726 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) |
||
| 2727 | : Instruction(Ty, Instruction::PHI, nullptr, 0, InsertAtEnd), |
||
| 2728 | ReservedSpace(NumReservedValues) { |
||
| 2729 | assert(!Ty->isTokenTy() && "PHI nodes cannot have token type!"); |
||
| 2730 | setName(NameStr); |
||
| 2731 | allocHungoffUses(ReservedSpace); |
||
| 2732 | } |
||
| 2733 | |||
| 2734 | protected: |
||
| 2735 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 2736 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 2737 | |||
| 2738 | PHINode *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 2739 | |||
| 2740 | // allocHungoffUses - this is more complicated than the generic |
||
| 2741 | // User::allocHungoffUses, because we have to allocate Uses for the incoming |
||
| 2742 | // values and pointers to the incoming blocks, all in one allocation. |
||
| 2743 | void allocHungoffUses(unsigned N) { |
||
| 2744 | User::allocHungoffUses(N, /* IsPhi */ true); |
||
| 2745 | } |
||
| 2746 | |||
| 2747 | public: |
||
| 2748 | /// Constructors - NumReservedValues is a hint for the number of incoming |
||
| 2749 | /// edges that this phi node will have (use 0 if you really have no idea). |
||
| 2750 | static PHINode *Create(Type *Ty, unsigned NumReservedValues, |
||
| 2751 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 2752 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 2753 | return new PHINode(Ty, NumReservedValues, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 2754 | } |
||
| 2755 | |||
| 2756 | static PHINode *Create(Type *Ty, unsigned NumReservedValues, |
||
| 2757 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 2758 | return new PHINode(Ty, NumReservedValues, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 2759 | } |
||
| 2760 | |||
| 2761 | /// Provide fast operand accessors |
||
| 2762 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 2763 | |||
| 2764 | // Block iterator interface. This provides access to the list of incoming |
||
| 2765 | // basic blocks, which parallels the list of incoming values. |
||
| 2766 | // Please note that we are not providing non-const iterators for blocks to |
||
| 2767 | // force all updates go through an interface function. |
||
| 2768 | |||
| 2769 | using block_iterator = BasicBlock **; |
||
| 2770 | using const_block_iterator = BasicBlock * const *; |
||
| 2771 | |||
| 2772 | const_block_iterator block_begin() const { |
||
| 2773 | return reinterpret_cast<const_block_iterator>(op_begin() + ReservedSpace); |
||
| 2774 | } |
||
| 2775 | |||
| 2776 | const_block_iterator block_end() const { |
||
| 2777 | return block_begin() + getNumOperands(); |
||
| 2778 | } |
||
| 2779 | |||
| 2780 | iterator_range<const_block_iterator> blocks() const { |
||
| 2781 | return make_range(block_begin(), block_end()); |
||
| 2782 | } |
||
| 2783 | |||
| 2784 | op_range incoming_values() { return operands(); } |
||
| 2785 | |||
| 2786 | const_op_range incoming_values() const { return operands(); } |
||
| 2787 | |||
| 2788 | /// Return the number of incoming edges |
||
| 2789 | /// |
||
| 2790 | unsigned getNumIncomingValues() const { return getNumOperands(); } |
||
| 2791 | |||
| 2792 | /// Return incoming value number x |
||
| 2793 | /// |
||
| 2794 | Value *getIncomingValue(unsigned i) const { |
||
| 2795 | return getOperand(i); |
||
| 2796 | } |
||
| 2797 | void setIncomingValue(unsigned i, Value *V) { |
||
| 2798 | assert(V && "PHI node got a null value!"); |
||
| 2799 | assert(getType() == V->getType() && |
||
| 2800 | "All operands to PHI node must be the same type as the PHI node!"); |
||
| 2801 | setOperand(i, V); |
||
| 2802 | } |
||
| 2803 | |||
| 2804 | static unsigned getOperandNumForIncomingValue(unsigned i) { |
||
| 2805 | return i; |
||
| 2806 | } |
||
| 2807 | |||
| 2808 | static unsigned getIncomingValueNumForOperand(unsigned i) { |
||
| 2809 | return i; |
||
| 2810 | } |
||
| 2811 | |||
| 2812 | /// Return incoming basic block number @p i. |
||
| 2813 | /// |
||
| 2814 | BasicBlock *getIncomingBlock(unsigned i) const { |
||
| 2815 | return block_begin()[i]; |
||
| 2816 | } |
||
| 2817 | |||
| 2818 | /// Return incoming basic block corresponding |
||
| 2819 | /// to an operand of the PHI. |
||
| 2820 | /// |
||
| 2821 | BasicBlock *getIncomingBlock(const Use &U) const { |
||
| 2822 | assert(this == U.getUser() && "Iterator doesn't point to PHI's Uses?"); |
||
| 2823 | return getIncomingBlock(unsigned(&U - op_begin())); |
||
| 2824 | } |
||
| 2825 | |||
| 2826 | /// Return incoming basic block corresponding |
||
| 2827 | /// to value use iterator. |
||
| 2828 | /// |
||
| 2829 | BasicBlock *getIncomingBlock(Value::const_user_iterator I) const { |
||
| 2830 | return getIncomingBlock(I.getUse()); |
||
| 2831 | } |
||
| 2832 | |||
| 2833 | void setIncomingBlock(unsigned i, BasicBlock *BB) { |
||
| 2834 | const_cast<block_iterator>(block_begin())[i] = BB; |
||
| 2835 | } |
||
| 2836 | |||
| 2837 | /// Copies the basic blocks from \p BBRange to the incoming basic block list |
||
| 2838 | /// of this PHINode, starting at \p ToIdx. |
||
| 2839 | void copyIncomingBlocks(iterator_range<const_block_iterator> BBRange, |
||
| 2840 | uint32_t ToIdx = 0) { |
||
| 2841 | copy(BBRange, const_cast<block_iterator>(block_begin()) + ToIdx); |
||
| 2842 | } |
||
| 2843 | |||
| 2844 | /// Replace every incoming basic block \p Old to basic block \p New. |
||
| 2845 | void replaceIncomingBlockWith(const BasicBlock *Old, BasicBlock *New) { |
||
| 2846 | assert(New && Old && "PHI node got a null basic block!"); |
||
| 2847 | for (unsigned Op = 0, NumOps = getNumOperands(); Op != NumOps; ++Op) |
||
| 2848 | if (getIncomingBlock(Op) == Old) |
||
| 2849 | setIncomingBlock(Op, New); |
||
| 2850 | } |
||
| 2851 | |||
| 2852 | /// Add an incoming value to the end of the PHI list |
||
| 2853 | /// |
||
| 2854 | void addIncoming(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB) { |
||
| 2855 | if (getNumOperands() == ReservedSpace) |
||
| 2856 | growOperands(); // Get more space! |
||
| 2857 | // Initialize some new operands. |
||
| 2858 | setNumHungOffUseOperands(getNumOperands() + 1); |
||
| 2859 | setIncomingValue(getNumOperands() - 1, V); |
||
| 2860 | setIncomingBlock(getNumOperands() - 1, BB); |
||
| 2861 | } |
||
| 2862 | |||
| 2863 | /// Remove an incoming value. This is useful if a |
||
| 2864 | /// predecessor basic block is deleted. The value removed is returned. |
||
| 2865 | /// |
||
| 2866 | /// If the last incoming value for a PHI node is removed (and DeletePHIIfEmpty |
||
| 2867 | /// is true), the PHI node is destroyed and any uses of it are replaced with |
||
| 2868 | /// dummy values. The only time there should be zero incoming values to a PHI |
||
| 2869 | /// node is when the block is dead, so this strategy is sound. |
||
| 2870 | /// |
||
| 2871 | Value *removeIncomingValue(unsigned Idx, bool DeletePHIIfEmpty = true); |
||
| 2872 | |||
| 2873 | Value *removeIncomingValue(const BasicBlock *BB, bool DeletePHIIfEmpty=true) { |
||
| 2874 | int Idx = getBasicBlockIndex(BB); |
||
| 2875 | assert(Idx >= 0 && "Invalid basic block argument to remove!"); |
||
| 2876 | return removeIncomingValue(Idx, DeletePHIIfEmpty); |
||
| 2877 | } |
||
| 2878 | |||
| 2879 | /// Return the first index of the specified basic |
||
| 2880 | /// block in the value list for this PHI. Returns -1 if no instance. |
||
| 2881 | /// |
||
| 2882 | int getBasicBlockIndex(const BasicBlock *BB) const { |
||
| 2883 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = getNumOperands(); i != e; ++i) |
||
| 2884 | if (block_begin()[i] == BB) |
||
| 2885 | return i; |
||
| 2886 | return -1; |
||
| 2887 | } |
||
| 2888 | |||
| 2889 | Value *getIncomingValueForBlock(const BasicBlock *BB) const { |
||
| 2890 | int Idx = getBasicBlockIndex(BB); |
||
| 2891 | assert(Idx >= 0 && "Invalid basic block argument!"); |
||
| 2892 | return getIncomingValue(Idx); |
||
| 2893 | } |
||
| 2894 | |||
| 2895 | /// Set every incoming value(s) for block \p BB to \p V. |
||
| 2896 | void setIncomingValueForBlock(const BasicBlock *BB, Value *V) { |
||
| 2897 | assert(BB && "PHI node got a null basic block!"); |
||
| 2898 | bool Found = false; |
||
| 2899 | for (unsigned Op = 0, NumOps = getNumOperands(); Op != NumOps; ++Op) |
||
| 2900 | if (getIncomingBlock(Op) == BB) { |
||
| 2901 | Found = true; |
||
| 2902 | setIncomingValue(Op, V); |
||
| 2903 | } |
||
| 2904 | (void)Found; |
||
| 2905 | assert(Found && "Invalid basic block argument to set!"); |
||
| 2906 | } |
||
| 2907 | |||
| 2908 | /// If the specified PHI node always merges together the |
||
| 2909 | /// same value, return the value, otherwise return null. |
||
| 2910 | Value *hasConstantValue() const; |
||
| 2911 | |||
| 2912 | /// Whether the specified PHI node always merges |
||
| 2913 | /// together the same value, assuming undefs are equal to a unique |
||
| 2914 | /// non-undef value. |
||
| 2915 | bool hasConstantOrUndefValue() const; |
||
| 2916 | |||
| 2917 | /// If the PHI node is complete which means all of its parent's predecessors |
||
| 2918 | /// have incoming value in this PHI, return true, otherwise return false. |
||
| 2919 | bool isComplete() const { |
||
| 2920 | return llvm::all_of(predecessors(getParent()), |
||
| 2921 | [this](const BasicBlock *Pred) { |
||
| 2922 | return getBasicBlockIndex(Pred) >= 0; |
||
| 2923 | }); |
||
| 2924 | } |
||
| 2925 | |||
| 2926 | /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 2927 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 2928 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::PHI; |
||
| 2929 | } |
||
| 2930 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 2931 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 2932 | } |
||
| 2933 | |||
| 2934 | private: |
||
| 2935 | void growOperands(); |
||
| 2936 | }; |
||
| 2937 | |||
| 2938 | template <> |
||
| 2939 | struct OperandTraits<PHINode> : public HungoffOperandTraits<2> { |
||
| 2940 | }; |
||
| 2941 | |||
| 2942 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(PHINode, Value) |
||
| 2943 | |||
| 2944 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 2945 | // LandingPadInst Class |
||
| 2946 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 2947 | |||
| 2948 | //===--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
||
| 2949 | /// The landingpad instruction holds all of the information |
||
| 2950 | /// necessary to generate correct exception handling. The landingpad instruction |
||
| 2951 | /// cannot be moved from the top of a landing pad block, which itself is |
||
| 2952 | /// accessible only from the 'unwind' edge of an invoke. This uses the |
||
| 2953 | /// SubclassData field in Value to store whether or not the landingpad is a |
||
| 2954 | /// cleanup. |
||
| 2955 | /// |
||
| 2956 | class LandingPadInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 2957 | using CleanupField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>; |
||
| 2958 | |||
| 2959 | /// The number of operands actually allocated. NumOperands is |
||
| 2960 | /// the number actually in use. |
||
| 2961 | unsigned ReservedSpace; |
||
| 2962 | |||
| 2963 | LandingPadInst(const LandingPadInst &LP); |
||
| 2964 | |||
| 2965 | public: |
||
| 2966 | enum ClauseType { Catch, Filter }; |
||
| 2967 | |||
| 2968 | private: |
||
| 2969 | explicit LandingPadInst(Type *RetTy, unsigned NumReservedValues, |
||
| 2970 | const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 2971 | explicit LandingPadInst(Type *RetTy, unsigned NumReservedValues, |
||
| 2972 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 2973 | |||
| 2974 | // Allocate space for exactly zero operands. |
||
| 2975 | void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S); } |
||
| 2976 | |||
| 2977 | void growOperands(unsigned Size); |
||
| 2978 | void init(unsigned NumReservedValues, const Twine &NameStr); |
||
| 2979 | |||
| 2980 | protected: |
||
| 2981 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 2982 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 2983 | |||
| 2984 | LandingPadInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 2985 | |||
| 2986 | public: |
||
| 2987 | void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); } |
||
| 2988 | |||
| 2989 | /// Constructors - NumReservedClauses is a hint for the number of incoming |
||
| 2990 | /// clauses that this landingpad will have (use 0 if you really have no idea). |
||
| 2991 | static LandingPadInst *Create(Type *RetTy, unsigned NumReservedClauses, |
||
| 2992 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 2993 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 2994 | static LandingPadInst *Create(Type *RetTy, unsigned NumReservedClauses, |
||
| 2995 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 2996 | |||
| 2997 | /// Provide fast operand accessors |
||
| 2998 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 2999 | |||
| 3000 | /// Return 'true' if this landingpad instruction is a |
||
| 3001 | /// cleanup. I.e., it should be run when unwinding even if its landing pad |
||
| 3002 | /// doesn't catch the exception. |
||
| 3003 | bool isCleanup() const { return getSubclassData<CleanupField>(); } |
||
| 3004 | |||
| 3005 | /// Indicate that this landingpad instruction is a cleanup. |
||
| 3006 | void setCleanup(bool V) { setSubclassData<CleanupField>(V); } |
||
| 3007 | |||
| 3008 | /// Add a catch or filter clause to the landing pad. |
||
| 3009 | void addClause(Constant *ClauseVal); |
||
| 3010 | |||
| 3011 | /// Get the value of the clause at index Idx. Use isCatch/isFilter to |
||
| 3012 | /// determine what type of clause this is. |
||
| 3013 | Constant *getClause(unsigned Idx) const { |
||
| 3014 | return cast<Constant>(getOperandList()[Idx]); |
||
| 3015 | } |
||
| 3016 | |||
| 3017 | /// Return 'true' if the clause and index Idx is a catch clause. |
||
| 3018 | bool isCatch(unsigned Idx) const { |
||
| 3019 | return !isa<ArrayType>(getOperandList()[Idx]->getType()); |
||
| 3020 | } |
||
| 3021 | |||
| 3022 | /// Return 'true' if the clause and index Idx is a filter clause. |
||
| 3023 | bool isFilter(unsigned Idx) const { |
||
| 3024 | return isa<ArrayType>(getOperandList()[Idx]->getType()); |
||
| 3025 | } |
||
| 3026 | |||
| 3027 | /// Get the number of clauses for this landing pad. |
||
| 3028 | unsigned getNumClauses() const { return getNumOperands(); } |
||
| 3029 | |||
| 3030 | /// Grow the size of the operand list to accommodate the new |
||
| 3031 | /// number of clauses. |
||
| 3032 | void reserveClauses(unsigned Size) { growOperands(Size); } |
||
| 3033 | |||
| 3034 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 3035 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 3036 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::LandingPad; |
||
| 3037 | } |
||
| 3038 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 3039 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 3040 | } |
||
| 3041 | }; |
||
| 3042 | |||
| 3043 | template <> |
||
| 3044 | struct OperandTraits<LandingPadInst> : public HungoffOperandTraits<1> { |
||
| 3045 | }; |
||
| 3046 | |||
| 3047 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(LandingPadInst, Value) |
||
| 3048 | |||
| 3049 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 3050 | // ReturnInst Class |
||
| 3051 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 3052 | |||
| 3053 | //===--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
||
| 3054 | /// Return a value (possibly void), from a function. Execution |
||
| 3055 | /// does not continue in this function any longer. |
||
| 3056 | /// |
||
| 3057 | class ReturnInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 3058 | ReturnInst(const ReturnInst &RI); |
||
| 3059 | |||
| 3060 | private: |
||
| 3061 | // ReturnInst constructors: |
||
| 3062 | // ReturnInst() - 'ret void' instruction |
||
| 3063 | // ReturnInst( null) - 'ret void' instruction |
||
| 3064 | // ReturnInst(Value* X) - 'ret X' instruction |
||
| 3065 | // ReturnInst( null, Inst *I) - 'ret void' instruction, insert before I |
||
| 3066 | // ReturnInst(Value* X, Inst *I) - 'ret X' instruction, insert before I |
||
| 3067 | // ReturnInst( null, BB *B) - 'ret void' instruction, insert @ end of B |
||
| 3068 | // ReturnInst(Value* X, BB *B) - 'ret X' instruction, insert @ end of B |
||
| 3069 | // |
||
| 3070 | // NOTE: If the Value* passed is of type void then the constructor behaves as |
||
| 3071 | // if it was passed NULL. |
||
| 3072 | explicit ReturnInst(LLVMContext &C, Value *retVal = nullptr, |
||
| 3073 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 3074 | ReturnInst(LLVMContext &C, Value *retVal, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3075 | explicit ReturnInst(LLVMContext &C, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3076 | |||
| 3077 | protected: |
||
| 3078 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 3079 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 3080 | |||
| 3081 | ReturnInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 3082 | |||
| 3083 | public: |
||
| 3084 | static ReturnInst* Create(LLVMContext &C, Value *retVal = nullptr, |
||
| 3085 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 3086 | return new(!!retVal) ReturnInst(C, retVal, InsertBefore); |
||
| 3087 | } |
||
| 3088 | |||
| 3089 | static ReturnInst* Create(LLVMContext &C, Value *retVal, |
||
| 3090 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 3091 | return new(!!retVal) ReturnInst(C, retVal, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3092 | } |
||
| 3093 | |||
| 3094 | static ReturnInst* Create(LLVMContext &C, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 3095 | return new(0) ReturnInst(C, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3096 | } |
||
| 3097 | |||
| 3098 | /// Provide fast operand accessors |
||
| 3099 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 3100 | |||
| 3101 | /// Convenience accessor. Returns null if there is no return value. |
||
| 3102 | Value *getReturnValue() const { |
||
| 3103 | return getNumOperands() != 0 ? getOperand(0) : nullptr; |
||
| 3104 | } |
||
| 3105 | |||
| 3106 | unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return 0; } |
||
| 3107 | |||
| 3108 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 3109 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 3110 | return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Ret); |
||
| 3111 | } |
||
| 3112 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 3113 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 3114 | } |
||
| 3115 | |||
| 3116 | private: |
||
| 3117 | BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned idx) const { |
||
| 3118 | llvm_unreachable("ReturnInst has no successors!"); |
||
| 3119 | } |
||
| 3120 | |||
| 3121 | void setSuccessor(unsigned idx, BasicBlock *B) { |
||
| 3122 | llvm_unreachable("ReturnInst has no successors!"); |
||
| 3123 | } |
||
| 3124 | }; |
||
| 3125 | |||
| 3126 | template <> |
||
| 3127 | struct OperandTraits<ReturnInst> : public VariadicOperandTraits<ReturnInst> { |
||
| 3128 | }; |
||
| 3129 | |||
| 3130 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(ReturnInst, Value) |
||
| 3131 | |||
| 3132 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 3133 | // BranchInst Class |
||
| 3134 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 3135 | |||
| 3136 | //===--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
||
| 3137 | /// Conditional or Unconditional Branch instruction. |
||
| 3138 | /// |
||
| 3139 | class BranchInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 3140 | /// Ops list - Branches are strange. The operands are ordered: |
||
| 3141 | /// [Cond, FalseDest,] TrueDest. This makes some accessors faster because |
||
| 3142 | /// they don't have to check for cond/uncond branchness. These are mostly |
||
| 3143 | /// accessed relative from op_end(). |
||
| 3144 | BranchInst(const BranchInst &BI); |
||
| 3145 | // BranchInst constructors (where {B, T, F} are blocks, and C is a condition): |
||
| 3146 | // BranchInst(BB *B) - 'br B' |
||
| 3147 | // BranchInst(BB* T, BB *F, Value *C) - 'br C, T, F' |
||
| 3148 | // BranchInst(BB* B, Inst *I) - 'br B' insert before I |
||
| 3149 | // BranchInst(BB* T, BB *F, Value *C, Inst *I) - 'br C, T, F', insert before I |
||
| 3150 | // BranchInst(BB* B, BB *I) - 'br B' insert at end |
||
| 3151 | // BranchInst(BB* T, BB *F, Value *C, BB *I) - 'br C, T, F', insert at end |
||
| 3152 | explicit BranchInst(BasicBlock *IfTrue, Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 3153 | BranchInst(BasicBlock *IfTrue, BasicBlock *IfFalse, Value *Cond, |
||
| 3154 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 3155 | BranchInst(BasicBlock *IfTrue, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3156 | BranchInst(BasicBlock *IfTrue, BasicBlock *IfFalse, Value *Cond, |
||
| 3157 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3158 | |||
| 3159 | void AssertOK(); |
||
| 3160 | |||
| 3161 | protected: |
||
| 3162 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 3163 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 3164 | |||
| 3165 | BranchInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 3166 | |||
| 3167 | public: |
||
| 3168 | /// Iterator type that casts an operand to a basic block. |
||
| 3169 | /// |
||
| 3170 | /// This only makes sense because the successors are stored as adjacent |
||
| 3171 | /// operands for branch instructions. |
||
| 3172 | struct succ_op_iterator |
||
| 3173 | : iterator_adaptor_base<succ_op_iterator, value_op_iterator, |
||
| 3174 | std::random_access_iterator_tag, BasicBlock *, |
||
| 3175 | ptrdiff_t, BasicBlock *, BasicBlock *> { |
||
| 3176 | explicit succ_op_iterator(value_op_iterator I) : iterator_adaptor_base(I) {} |
||
| 3177 | |||
| 3178 | BasicBlock *operator*() const { return cast<BasicBlock>(*I); } |
||
| 3179 | BasicBlock *operator->() const { return operator*(); } |
||
| 3180 | }; |
||
| 3181 | |||
| 3182 | /// The const version of `succ_op_iterator`. |
||
| 3183 | struct const_succ_op_iterator |
||
| 3184 | : iterator_adaptor_base<const_succ_op_iterator, const_value_op_iterator, |
||
| 3185 | std::random_access_iterator_tag, |
||
| 3186 | const BasicBlock *, ptrdiff_t, const BasicBlock *, |
||
| 3187 | const BasicBlock *> { |
||
| 3188 | explicit const_succ_op_iterator(const_value_op_iterator I) |
||
| 3189 | : iterator_adaptor_base(I) {} |
||
| 3190 | |||
| 3191 | const BasicBlock *operator*() const { return cast<BasicBlock>(*I); } |
||
| 3192 | const BasicBlock *operator->() const { return operator*(); } |
||
| 3193 | }; |
||
| 3194 | |||
| 3195 | static BranchInst *Create(BasicBlock *IfTrue, |
||
| 3196 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 3197 | return new(1) BranchInst(IfTrue, InsertBefore); |
||
| 3198 | } |
||
| 3199 | |||
| 3200 | static BranchInst *Create(BasicBlock *IfTrue, BasicBlock *IfFalse, |
||
| 3201 | Value *Cond, Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 3202 | return new(3) BranchInst(IfTrue, IfFalse, Cond, InsertBefore); |
||
| 3203 | } |
||
| 3204 | |||
| 3205 | static BranchInst *Create(BasicBlock *IfTrue, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 3206 | return new(1) BranchInst(IfTrue, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3207 | } |
||
| 3208 | |||
| 3209 | static BranchInst *Create(BasicBlock *IfTrue, BasicBlock *IfFalse, |
||
| 3210 | Value *Cond, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 3211 | return new(3) BranchInst(IfTrue, IfFalse, Cond, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3212 | } |
||
| 3213 | |||
| 3214 | /// Transparently provide more efficient getOperand methods. |
||
| 3215 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 3216 | |||
| 3217 | bool isUnconditional() const { return getNumOperands() == 1; } |
||
| 3218 | bool isConditional() const { return getNumOperands() == 3; } |
||
| 3219 | |||
| 3220 | Value *getCondition() const { |
||
| 3221 | assert(isConditional() && "Cannot get condition of an uncond branch!"); |
||
| 3222 | return Op<-3>(); |
||
| 3223 | } |
||
| 3224 | |||
| 3225 | void setCondition(Value *V) { |
||
| 3226 | assert(isConditional() && "Cannot set condition of unconditional branch!"); |
||
| 3227 | Op<-3>() = V; |
||
| 3228 | } |
||
| 3229 | |||
| 3230 | unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return 1+isConditional(); } |
||
| 3231 | |||
| 3232 | BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned i) const { |
||
| 3233 | assert(i < getNumSuccessors() && "Successor # out of range for Branch!"); |
||
| 3234 | return cast_or_null<BasicBlock>((&Op<-1>() - i)->get()); |
||
| 3235 | } |
||
| 3236 | |||
| 3237 | void setSuccessor(unsigned idx, BasicBlock *NewSucc) { |
||
| 3238 | assert(idx < getNumSuccessors() && "Successor # out of range for Branch!"); |
||
| 3239 | *(&Op<-1>() - idx) = NewSucc; |
||
| 3240 | } |
||
| 3241 | |||
| 3242 | /// Swap the successors of this branch instruction. |
||
| 3243 | /// |
||
| 3244 | /// Swaps the successors of the branch instruction. This also swaps any |
||
| 3245 | /// branch weight metadata associated with the instruction so that it |
||
| 3246 | /// continues to map correctly to each operand. |
||
| 3247 | void swapSuccessors(); |
||
| 3248 | |||
| 3249 | iterator_range<succ_op_iterator> successors() { |
||
| 3250 | return make_range( |
||
| 3251 | succ_op_iterator(std::next(value_op_begin(), isConditional() ? 1 : 0)), |
||
| 3252 | succ_op_iterator(value_op_end())); |
||
| 3253 | } |
||
| 3254 | |||
| 3255 | iterator_range<const_succ_op_iterator> successors() const { |
||
| 3256 | return make_range(const_succ_op_iterator( |
||
| 3257 | std::next(value_op_begin(), isConditional() ? 1 : 0)), |
||
| 3258 | const_succ_op_iterator(value_op_end())); |
||
| 3259 | } |
||
| 3260 | |||
| 3261 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 3262 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 3263 | return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Br); |
||
| 3264 | } |
||
| 3265 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 3266 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 3267 | } |
||
| 3268 | }; |
||
| 3269 | |||
| 3270 | template <> |
||
| 3271 | struct OperandTraits<BranchInst> : public VariadicOperandTraits<BranchInst, 1> { |
||
| 3272 | }; |
||
| 3273 | |||
| 3274 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(BranchInst, Value) |
||
| 3275 | |||
| 3276 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 3277 | // SwitchInst Class |
||
| 3278 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 3279 | |||
| 3280 | //===--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
||
| 3281 | /// Multiway switch |
||
| 3282 | /// |
||
| 3283 | class SwitchInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 3284 | unsigned ReservedSpace; |
||
| 3285 | |||
| 3286 | // Operand[0] = Value to switch on |
||
| 3287 | // Operand[1] = Default basic block destination |
||
| 3288 | // Operand[2n ] = Value to match |
||
| 3289 | // Operand[2n+1] = BasicBlock to go to on match |
||
| 3290 | SwitchInst(const SwitchInst &SI); |
||
| 3291 | |||
| 3292 | /// Create a new switch instruction, specifying a value to switch on and a |
||
| 3293 | /// default destination. The number of additional cases can be specified here |
||
| 3294 | /// to make memory allocation more efficient. This constructor can also |
||
| 3295 | /// auto-insert before another instruction. |
||
| 3296 | SwitchInst(Value *Value, BasicBlock *Default, unsigned NumCases, |
||
| 3297 | Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 3298 | |||
| 3299 | /// Create a new switch instruction, specifying a value to switch on and a |
||
| 3300 | /// default destination. The number of additional cases can be specified here |
||
| 3301 | /// to make memory allocation more efficient. This constructor also |
||
| 3302 | /// auto-inserts at the end of the specified BasicBlock. |
||
| 3303 | SwitchInst(Value *Value, BasicBlock *Default, unsigned NumCases, |
||
| 3304 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3305 | |||
| 3306 | // allocate space for exactly zero operands |
||
| 3307 | void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S); } |
||
| 3308 | |||
| 3309 | void init(Value *Value, BasicBlock *Default, unsigned NumReserved); |
||
| 3310 | void growOperands(); |
||
| 3311 | |||
| 3312 | protected: |
||
| 3313 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 3314 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 3315 | |||
| 3316 | SwitchInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 3317 | |||
| 3318 | public: |
||
| 3319 | void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); } |
||
| 3320 | |||
| 3321 | // -2 |
||
| 3322 | static const unsigned DefaultPseudoIndex = static_cast<unsigned>(~0L-1); |
||
| 3323 | |||
| 3324 | template <typename CaseHandleT> class CaseIteratorImpl; |
||
| 3325 | |||
| 3326 | /// A handle to a particular switch case. It exposes a convenient interface |
||
| 3327 | /// to both the case value and the successor block. |
||
| 3328 | /// |
||
| 3329 | /// We define this as a template and instantiate it to form both a const and |
||
| 3330 | /// non-const handle. |
||
| 3331 | template <typename SwitchInstT, typename ConstantIntT, typename BasicBlockT> |
||
| 3332 | class CaseHandleImpl { |
||
| 3333 | // Directly befriend both const and non-const iterators. |
||
| 3334 | friend class SwitchInst::CaseIteratorImpl< |
||
| 3335 | CaseHandleImpl<SwitchInstT, ConstantIntT, BasicBlockT>>; |
||
| 3336 | |||
| 3337 | protected: |
||
| 3338 | // Expose the switch type we're parameterized with to the iterator. |
||
| 3339 | using SwitchInstType = SwitchInstT; |
||
| 3340 | |||
| 3341 | SwitchInstT *SI; |
||
| 3342 | ptrdiff_t Index; |
||
| 3343 | |||
| 3344 | CaseHandleImpl() = default; |
||
| 3345 | CaseHandleImpl(SwitchInstT *SI, ptrdiff_t Index) : SI(SI), Index(Index) {} |
||
| 3346 | |||
| 3347 | public: |
||
| 3348 | /// Resolves case value for current case. |
||
| 3349 | ConstantIntT *getCaseValue() const { |
||
| 3350 | assert((unsigned)Index < SI->getNumCases() && |
||
| 3351 | "Index out the number of cases."); |
||
| 3352 | return reinterpret_cast<ConstantIntT *>(SI->getOperand(2 + Index * 2)); |
||
| 3353 | } |
||
| 3354 | |||
| 3355 | /// Resolves successor for current case. |
||
| 3356 | BasicBlockT *getCaseSuccessor() const { |
||
| 3357 | assert(((unsigned)Index < SI->getNumCases() || |
||
| 3358 | (unsigned)Index == DefaultPseudoIndex) && |
||
| 3359 | "Index out the number of cases."); |
||
| 3360 | return SI->getSuccessor(getSuccessorIndex()); |
||
| 3361 | } |
||
| 3362 | |||
| 3363 | /// Returns number of current case. |
||
| 3364 | unsigned getCaseIndex() const { return Index; } |
||
| 3365 | |||
| 3366 | /// Returns successor index for current case successor. |
||
| 3367 | unsigned getSuccessorIndex() const { |
||
| 3368 | assert(((unsigned)Index == DefaultPseudoIndex || |
||
| 3369 | (unsigned)Index < SI->getNumCases()) && |
||
| 3370 | "Index out the number of cases."); |
||
| 3371 | return (unsigned)Index != DefaultPseudoIndex ? Index + 1 : 0; |
||
| 3372 | } |
||
| 3373 | |||
| 3374 | bool operator==(const CaseHandleImpl &RHS) const { |
||
| 3375 | assert(SI == RHS.SI && "Incompatible operators."); |
||
| 3376 | return Index == RHS.Index; |
||
| 3377 | } |
||
| 3378 | }; |
||
| 3379 | |||
| 3380 | using ConstCaseHandle = |
||
| 3381 | CaseHandleImpl<const SwitchInst, const ConstantInt, const BasicBlock>; |
||
| 3382 | |||
| 3383 | class CaseHandle |
||
| 3384 | : public CaseHandleImpl<SwitchInst, ConstantInt, BasicBlock> { |
||
| 3385 | friend class SwitchInst::CaseIteratorImpl<CaseHandle>; |
||
| 3386 | |||
| 3387 | public: |
||
| 3388 | CaseHandle(SwitchInst *SI, ptrdiff_t Index) : CaseHandleImpl(SI, Index) {} |
||
| 3389 | |||
| 3390 | /// Sets the new value for current case. |
||
| 3391 | void setValue(ConstantInt *V) const { |
||
| 3392 | assert((unsigned)Index < SI->getNumCases() && |
||
| 3393 | "Index out the number of cases."); |
||
| 3394 | SI->setOperand(2 + Index*2, reinterpret_cast<Value*>(V)); |
||
| 3395 | } |
||
| 3396 | |||
| 3397 | /// Sets the new successor for current case. |
||
| 3398 | void setSuccessor(BasicBlock *S) const { |
||
| 3399 | SI->setSuccessor(getSuccessorIndex(), S); |
||
| 3400 | } |
||
| 3401 | }; |
||
| 3402 | |||
| 3403 | template <typename CaseHandleT> |
||
| 3404 | class CaseIteratorImpl |
||
| 3405 | : public iterator_facade_base<CaseIteratorImpl<CaseHandleT>, |
||
| 3406 | std::random_access_iterator_tag, |
||
| 3407 | const CaseHandleT> { |
||
| 3408 | using SwitchInstT = typename CaseHandleT::SwitchInstType; |
||
| 3409 | |||
| 3410 | CaseHandleT Case; |
||
| 3411 | |||
| 3412 | public: |
||
| 3413 | /// Default constructed iterator is in an invalid state until assigned to |
||
| 3414 | /// a case for a particular switch. |
||
| 3415 | CaseIteratorImpl() = default; |
||
| 3416 | |||
| 3417 | /// Initializes case iterator for given SwitchInst and for given |
||
| 3418 | /// case number. |
||
| 3419 | CaseIteratorImpl(SwitchInstT *SI, unsigned CaseNum) : Case(SI, CaseNum) {} |
||
| 3420 | |||
| 3421 | /// Initializes case iterator for given SwitchInst and for given |
||
| 3422 | /// successor index. |
||
| 3423 | static CaseIteratorImpl fromSuccessorIndex(SwitchInstT *SI, |
||
| 3424 | unsigned SuccessorIndex) { |
||
| 3425 | assert(SuccessorIndex < SI->getNumSuccessors() && |
||
| 3426 | "Successor index # out of range!"); |
||
| 3427 | return SuccessorIndex != 0 ? CaseIteratorImpl(SI, SuccessorIndex - 1) |
||
| 3428 | : CaseIteratorImpl(SI, DefaultPseudoIndex); |
||
| 3429 | } |
||
| 3430 | |||
| 3431 | /// Support converting to the const variant. This will be a no-op for const |
||
| 3432 | /// variant. |
||
| 3433 | operator CaseIteratorImpl<ConstCaseHandle>() const { |
||
| 3434 | return CaseIteratorImpl<ConstCaseHandle>(Case.SI, Case.Index); |
||
| 3435 | } |
||
| 3436 | |||
| 3437 | CaseIteratorImpl &operator+=(ptrdiff_t N) { |
||
| 3438 | // Check index correctness after addition. |
||
| 3439 | // Note: Index == getNumCases() means end(). |
||
| 3440 | assert(Case.Index + N >= 0 && |
||
| 3441 | (unsigned)(Case.Index + N) <= Case.SI->getNumCases() && |
||
| 3442 | "Case.Index out the number of cases."); |
||
| 3443 | Case.Index += N; |
||
| 3444 | return *this; |
||
| 3445 | } |
||
| 3446 | CaseIteratorImpl &operator-=(ptrdiff_t N) { |
||
| 3447 | // Check index correctness after subtraction. |
||
| 3448 | // Note: Case.Index == getNumCases() means end(). |
||
| 3449 | assert(Case.Index - N >= 0 && |
||
| 3450 | (unsigned)(Case.Index - N) <= Case.SI->getNumCases() && |
||
| 3451 | "Case.Index out the number of cases."); |
||
| 3452 | Case.Index -= N; |
||
| 3453 | return *this; |
||
| 3454 | } |
||
| 3455 | ptrdiff_t operator-(const CaseIteratorImpl &RHS) const { |
||
| 3456 | assert(Case.SI == RHS.Case.SI && "Incompatible operators."); |
||
| 3457 | return Case.Index - RHS.Case.Index; |
||
| 3458 | } |
||
| 3459 | bool operator==(const CaseIteratorImpl &RHS) const { |
||
| 3460 | return Case == RHS.Case; |
||
| 3461 | } |
||
| 3462 | bool operator<(const CaseIteratorImpl &RHS) const { |
||
| 3463 | assert(Case.SI == RHS.Case.SI && "Incompatible operators."); |
||
| 3464 | return Case.Index < RHS.Case.Index; |
||
| 3465 | } |
||
| 3466 | const CaseHandleT &operator*() const { return Case; } |
||
| 3467 | }; |
||
| 3468 | |||
| 3469 | using CaseIt = CaseIteratorImpl<CaseHandle>; |
||
| 3470 | using ConstCaseIt = CaseIteratorImpl<ConstCaseHandle>; |
||
| 3471 | |||
| 3472 | static SwitchInst *Create(Value *Value, BasicBlock *Default, |
||
| 3473 | unsigned NumCases, |
||
| 3474 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 3475 | return new SwitchInst(Value, Default, NumCases, InsertBefore); |
||
| 3476 | } |
||
| 3477 | |||
| 3478 | static SwitchInst *Create(Value *Value, BasicBlock *Default, |
||
| 3479 | unsigned NumCases, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 3480 | return new SwitchInst(Value, Default, NumCases, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3481 | } |
||
| 3482 | |||
| 3483 | /// Provide fast operand accessors |
||
| 3484 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 3485 | |||
| 3486 | // Accessor Methods for Switch stmt |
||
| 3487 | Value *getCondition() const { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 3488 | void setCondition(Value *V) { setOperand(0, V); } |
||
| 3489 | |||
| 3490 | BasicBlock *getDefaultDest() const { |
||
| 3491 | return cast<BasicBlock>(getOperand(1)); |
||
| 3492 | } |
||
| 3493 | |||
| 3494 | void setDefaultDest(BasicBlock *DefaultCase) { |
||
| 3495 | setOperand(1, reinterpret_cast<Value*>(DefaultCase)); |
||
| 3496 | } |
||
| 3497 | |||
| 3498 | /// Return the number of 'cases' in this switch instruction, excluding the |
||
| 3499 | /// default case. |
||
| 3500 | unsigned getNumCases() const { |
||
| 3501 | return getNumOperands()/2 - 1; |
||
| 3502 | } |
||
| 3503 | |||
| 3504 | /// Returns a read/write iterator that points to the first case in the |
||
| 3505 | /// SwitchInst. |
||
| 3506 | CaseIt case_begin() { |
||
| 3507 | return CaseIt(this, 0); |
||
| 3508 | } |
||
| 3509 | |||
| 3510 | /// Returns a read-only iterator that points to the first case in the |
||
| 3511 | /// SwitchInst. |
||
| 3512 | ConstCaseIt case_begin() const { |
||
| 3513 | return ConstCaseIt(this, 0); |
||
| 3514 | } |
||
| 3515 | |||
| 3516 | /// Returns a read/write iterator that points one past the last in the |
||
| 3517 | /// SwitchInst. |
||
| 3518 | CaseIt case_end() { |
||
| 3519 | return CaseIt(this, getNumCases()); |
||
| 3520 | } |
||
| 3521 | |||
| 3522 | /// Returns a read-only iterator that points one past the last in the |
||
| 3523 | /// SwitchInst. |
||
| 3524 | ConstCaseIt case_end() const { |
||
| 3525 | return ConstCaseIt(this, getNumCases()); |
||
| 3526 | } |
||
| 3527 | |||
| 3528 | /// Iteration adapter for range-for loops. |
||
| 3529 | iterator_range<CaseIt> cases() { |
||
| 3530 | return make_range(case_begin(), case_end()); |
||
| 3531 | } |
||
| 3532 | |||
| 3533 | /// Constant iteration adapter for range-for loops. |
||
| 3534 | iterator_range<ConstCaseIt> cases() const { |
||
| 3535 | return make_range(case_begin(), case_end()); |
||
| 3536 | } |
||
| 3537 | |||
| 3538 | /// Returns an iterator that points to the default case. |
||
| 3539 | /// Note: this iterator allows to resolve successor only. Attempt |
||
| 3540 | /// to resolve case value causes an assertion. |
||
| 3541 | /// Also note, that increment and decrement also causes an assertion and |
||
| 3542 | /// makes iterator invalid. |
||
| 3543 | CaseIt case_default() { |
||
| 3544 | return CaseIt(this, DefaultPseudoIndex); |
||
| 3545 | } |
||
| 3546 | ConstCaseIt case_default() const { |
||
| 3547 | return ConstCaseIt(this, DefaultPseudoIndex); |
||
| 3548 | } |
||
| 3549 | |||
| 3550 | /// Search all of the case values for the specified constant. If it is |
||
| 3551 | /// explicitly handled, return the case iterator of it, otherwise return |
||
| 3552 | /// default case iterator to indicate that it is handled by the default |
||
| 3553 | /// handler. |
||
| 3554 | CaseIt findCaseValue(const ConstantInt *C) { |
||
| 3555 | return CaseIt( |
||
| 3556 | this, |
||
| 3557 | const_cast<const SwitchInst *>(this)->findCaseValue(C)->getCaseIndex()); |
||
| 3558 | } |
||
| 3559 | ConstCaseIt findCaseValue(const ConstantInt *C) const { |
||
| 3560 | ConstCaseIt I = llvm::find_if(cases(), [C](const ConstCaseHandle &Case) { |
||
| 3561 | return Case.getCaseValue() == C; |
||
| 3562 | }); |
||
| 3563 | if (I != case_end()) |
||
| 3564 | return I; |
||
| 3565 | |||
| 3566 | return case_default(); |
||
| 3567 | } |
||
| 3568 | |||
| 3569 | /// Finds the unique case value for a given successor. Returns null if the |
||
| 3570 | /// successor is not found, not unique, or is the default case. |
||
| 3571 | ConstantInt *findCaseDest(BasicBlock *BB) { |
||
| 3572 | if (BB == getDefaultDest()) |
||
| 3573 | return nullptr; |
||
| 3574 | |||
| 3575 | ConstantInt *CI = nullptr; |
||
| 3576 | for (auto Case : cases()) { |
||
| 3577 | if (Case.getCaseSuccessor() != BB) |
||
| 3578 | continue; |
||
| 3579 | |||
| 3580 | if (CI) |
||
| 3581 | return nullptr; // Multiple cases lead to BB. |
||
| 3582 | |||
| 3583 | CI = Case.getCaseValue(); |
||
| 3584 | } |
||
| 3585 | |||
| 3586 | return CI; |
||
| 3587 | } |
||
| 3588 | |||
| 3589 | /// Add an entry to the switch instruction. |
||
| 3590 | /// Note: |
||
| 3591 | /// This action invalidates case_end(). Old case_end() iterator will |
||
| 3592 | /// point to the added case. |
||
| 3593 | void addCase(ConstantInt *OnVal, BasicBlock *Dest); |
||
| 3594 | |||
| 3595 | /// This method removes the specified case and its successor from the switch |
||
| 3596 | /// instruction. Note that this operation may reorder the remaining cases at |
||
| 3597 | /// index idx and above. |
||
| 3598 | /// Note: |
||
| 3599 | /// This action invalidates iterators for all cases following the one removed, |
||
| 3600 | /// including the case_end() iterator. It returns an iterator for the next |
||
| 3601 | /// case. |
||
| 3602 | CaseIt removeCase(CaseIt I); |
||
| 3603 | |||
| 3604 | unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return getNumOperands()/2; } |
||
| 3605 | BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned idx) const { |
||
| 3606 | assert(idx < getNumSuccessors() &&"Successor idx out of range for switch!"); |
||
| 3607 | return cast<BasicBlock>(getOperand(idx*2+1)); |
||
| 3608 | } |
||
| 3609 | void setSuccessor(unsigned idx, BasicBlock *NewSucc) { |
||
| 3610 | assert(idx < getNumSuccessors() && "Successor # out of range for switch!"); |
||
| 3611 | setOperand(idx * 2 + 1, NewSucc); |
||
| 3612 | } |
||
| 3613 | |||
| 3614 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 3615 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 3616 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Switch; |
||
| 3617 | } |
||
| 3618 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 3619 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 3620 | } |
||
| 3621 | }; |
||
| 3622 | |||
| 3623 | /// A wrapper class to simplify modification of SwitchInst cases along with |
||
| 3624 | /// their prof branch_weights metadata. |
||
| 3625 | class SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper { |
||
| 3626 | SwitchInst &SI; |
||
| 3627 | std::optional<SmallVector<uint32_t, 8>> Weights; |
||
| 3628 | bool Changed = false; |
||
| 3629 | |||
| 3630 | protected: |
||
| 3631 | MDNode *buildProfBranchWeightsMD(); |
||
| 3632 | |||
| 3633 | void init(); |
||
| 3634 | |||
| 3635 | public: |
||
| 3636 | using CaseWeightOpt = std::optional<uint32_t>; |
||
| 3637 | SwitchInst *operator->() { return &SI; } |
||
| 3638 | SwitchInst &operator*() { return SI; } |
||
| 3639 | operator SwitchInst *() { return &SI; } |
||
| 3640 | |||
| 3641 | SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper(SwitchInst &SI) : SI(SI) { init(); } |
||
| 3642 | |||
| 3643 | ~SwitchInstProfUpdateWrapper() { |
||
| 3644 | if (Changed) |
||
| 3645 | SI.setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, buildProfBranchWeightsMD()); |
||
| 3646 | } |
||
| 3647 | |||
| 3648 | /// Delegate the call to the underlying SwitchInst::removeCase() and remove |
||
| 3649 | /// correspondent branch weight. |
||
| 3650 | SwitchInst::CaseIt removeCase(SwitchInst::CaseIt I); |
||
| 3651 | |||
| 3652 | /// Delegate the call to the underlying SwitchInst::addCase() and set the |
||
| 3653 | /// specified branch weight for the added case. |
||
| 3654 | void addCase(ConstantInt *OnVal, BasicBlock *Dest, CaseWeightOpt W); |
||
| 3655 | |||
| 3656 | /// Delegate the call to the underlying SwitchInst::eraseFromParent() and mark |
||
| 3657 | /// this object to not touch the underlying SwitchInst in destructor. |
||
| 3658 | SymbolTableList<Instruction>::iterator eraseFromParent(); |
||
| 3659 | |||
| 3660 | void setSuccessorWeight(unsigned idx, CaseWeightOpt W); |
||
| 3661 | CaseWeightOpt getSuccessorWeight(unsigned idx); |
||
| 3662 | |||
| 3663 | static CaseWeightOpt getSuccessorWeight(const SwitchInst &SI, unsigned idx); |
||
| 3664 | }; |
||
| 3665 | |||
| 3666 | template <> |
||
| 3667 | struct OperandTraits<SwitchInst> : public HungoffOperandTraits<2> { |
||
| 3668 | }; |
||
| 3669 | |||
| 3670 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(SwitchInst, Value) |
||
| 3671 | |||
| 3672 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 3673 | // IndirectBrInst Class |
||
| 3674 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 3675 | |||
| 3676 | //===--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
||
| 3677 | /// Indirect Branch Instruction. |
||
| 3678 | /// |
||
| 3679 | class IndirectBrInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 3680 | unsigned ReservedSpace; |
||
| 3681 | |||
| 3682 | // Operand[0] = Address to jump to |
||
| 3683 | // Operand[n+1] = n-th destination |
||
| 3684 | IndirectBrInst(const IndirectBrInst &IBI); |
||
| 3685 | |||
| 3686 | /// Create a new indirectbr instruction, specifying an |
||
| 3687 | /// Address to jump to. The number of expected destinations can be specified |
||
| 3688 | /// here to make memory allocation more efficient. This constructor can also |
||
| 3689 | /// autoinsert before another instruction. |
||
| 3690 | IndirectBrInst(Value *Address, unsigned NumDests, Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 3691 | |||
| 3692 | /// Create a new indirectbr instruction, specifying an |
||
| 3693 | /// Address to jump to. The number of expected destinations can be specified |
||
| 3694 | /// here to make memory allocation more efficient. This constructor also |
||
| 3695 | /// autoinserts at the end of the specified BasicBlock. |
||
| 3696 | IndirectBrInst(Value *Address, unsigned NumDests, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3697 | |||
| 3698 | // allocate space for exactly zero operands |
||
| 3699 | void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S); } |
||
| 3700 | |||
| 3701 | void init(Value *Address, unsigned NumDests); |
||
| 3702 | void growOperands(); |
||
| 3703 | |||
| 3704 | protected: |
||
| 3705 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 3706 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 3707 | |||
| 3708 | IndirectBrInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 3709 | |||
| 3710 | public: |
||
| 3711 | void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); } |
||
| 3712 | |||
| 3713 | /// Iterator type that casts an operand to a basic block. |
||
| 3714 | /// |
||
| 3715 | /// This only makes sense because the successors are stored as adjacent |
||
| 3716 | /// operands for indirectbr instructions. |
||
| 3717 | struct succ_op_iterator |
||
| 3718 | : iterator_adaptor_base<succ_op_iterator, value_op_iterator, |
||
| 3719 | std::random_access_iterator_tag, BasicBlock *, |
||
| 3720 | ptrdiff_t, BasicBlock *, BasicBlock *> { |
||
| 3721 | explicit succ_op_iterator(value_op_iterator I) : iterator_adaptor_base(I) {} |
||
| 3722 | |||
| 3723 | BasicBlock *operator*() const { return cast<BasicBlock>(*I); } |
||
| 3724 | BasicBlock *operator->() const { return operator*(); } |
||
| 3725 | }; |
||
| 3726 | |||
| 3727 | /// The const version of `succ_op_iterator`. |
||
| 3728 | struct const_succ_op_iterator |
||
| 3729 | : iterator_adaptor_base<const_succ_op_iterator, const_value_op_iterator, |
||
| 3730 | std::random_access_iterator_tag, |
||
| 3731 | const BasicBlock *, ptrdiff_t, const BasicBlock *, |
||
| 3732 | const BasicBlock *> { |
||
| 3733 | explicit const_succ_op_iterator(const_value_op_iterator I) |
||
| 3734 | : iterator_adaptor_base(I) {} |
||
| 3735 | |||
| 3736 | const BasicBlock *operator*() const { return cast<BasicBlock>(*I); } |
||
| 3737 | const BasicBlock *operator->() const { return operator*(); } |
||
| 3738 | }; |
||
| 3739 | |||
| 3740 | static IndirectBrInst *Create(Value *Address, unsigned NumDests, |
||
| 3741 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 3742 | return new IndirectBrInst(Address, NumDests, InsertBefore); |
||
| 3743 | } |
||
| 3744 | |||
| 3745 | static IndirectBrInst *Create(Value *Address, unsigned NumDests, |
||
| 3746 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 3747 | return new IndirectBrInst(Address, NumDests, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3748 | } |
||
| 3749 | |||
| 3750 | /// Provide fast operand accessors. |
||
| 3751 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 3752 | |||
| 3753 | // Accessor Methods for IndirectBrInst instruction. |
||
| 3754 | Value *getAddress() { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 3755 | const Value *getAddress() const { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 3756 | void setAddress(Value *V) { setOperand(0, V); } |
||
| 3757 | |||
| 3758 | /// return the number of possible destinations in this |
||
| 3759 | /// indirectbr instruction. |
||
| 3760 | unsigned getNumDestinations() const { return getNumOperands()-1; } |
||
| 3761 | |||
| 3762 | /// Return the specified destination. |
||
| 3763 | BasicBlock *getDestination(unsigned i) { return getSuccessor(i); } |
||
| 3764 | const BasicBlock *getDestination(unsigned i) const { return getSuccessor(i); } |
||
| 3765 | |||
| 3766 | /// Add a destination. |
||
| 3767 | /// |
||
| 3768 | void addDestination(BasicBlock *Dest); |
||
| 3769 | |||
| 3770 | /// This method removes the specified successor from the |
||
| 3771 | /// indirectbr instruction. |
||
| 3772 | void removeDestination(unsigned i); |
||
| 3773 | |||
| 3774 | unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return getNumOperands()-1; } |
||
| 3775 | BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned i) const { |
||
| 3776 | return cast<BasicBlock>(getOperand(i+1)); |
||
| 3777 | } |
||
| 3778 | void setSuccessor(unsigned i, BasicBlock *NewSucc) { |
||
| 3779 | setOperand(i + 1, NewSucc); |
||
| 3780 | } |
||
| 3781 | |||
| 3782 | iterator_range<succ_op_iterator> successors() { |
||
| 3783 | return make_range(succ_op_iterator(std::next(value_op_begin())), |
||
| 3784 | succ_op_iterator(value_op_end())); |
||
| 3785 | } |
||
| 3786 | |||
| 3787 | iterator_range<const_succ_op_iterator> successors() const { |
||
| 3788 | return make_range(const_succ_op_iterator(std::next(value_op_begin())), |
||
| 3789 | const_succ_op_iterator(value_op_end())); |
||
| 3790 | } |
||
| 3791 | |||
| 3792 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 3793 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 3794 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::IndirectBr; |
||
| 3795 | } |
||
| 3796 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 3797 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 3798 | } |
||
| 3799 | }; |
||
| 3800 | |||
| 3801 | template <> |
||
| 3802 | struct OperandTraits<IndirectBrInst> : public HungoffOperandTraits<1> { |
||
| 3803 | }; |
||
| 3804 | |||
| 3805 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(IndirectBrInst, Value) |
||
| 3806 | |||
| 3807 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 3808 | // InvokeInst Class |
||
| 3809 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 3810 | |||
| 3811 | /// Invoke instruction. The SubclassData field is used to hold the |
||
| 3812 | /// calling convention of the call. |
||
| 3813 | /// |
||
| 3814 | class InvokeInst : public CallBase { |
||
| 3815 | /// The number of operands for this call beyond the called function, |
||
| 3816 | /// arguments, and operand bundles. |
||
| 3817 | static constexpr int NumExtraOperands = 2; |
||
| 3818 | |||
| 3819 | /// The index from the end of the operand array to the normal destination. |
||
| 3820 | static constexpr int NormalDestOpEndIdx = -3; |
||
| 3821 | |||
| 3822 | /// The index from the end of the operand array to the unwind destination. |
||
| 3823 | static constexpr int UnwindDestOpEndIdx = -2; |
||
| 3824 | |||
| 3825 | InvokeInst(const InvokeInst &BI); |
||
| 3826 | |||
| 3827 | /// Construct an InvokeInst given a range of arguments. |
||
| 3828 | /// |
||
| 3829 | /// Construct an InvokeInst from a range of arguments |
||
| 3830 | inline InvokeInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal, |
||
| 3831 | BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 3832 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands, |
||
| 3833 | const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 3834 | |||
| 3835 | inline InvokeInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal, |
||
| 3836 | BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 3837 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands, |
||
| 3838 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3839 | |||
| 3840 | void init(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal, |
||
| 3841 | BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 3842 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr); |
||
| 3843 | |||
| 3844 | /// Compute the number of operands to allocate. |
||
| 3845 | static int ComputeNumOperands(int NumArgs, int NumBundleInputs = 0) { |
||
| 3846 | // We need one operand for the called function, plus our extra operands and |
||
| 3847 | // the input operand counts provided. |
||
| 3848 | return 1 + NumExtraOperands + NumArgs + NumBundleInputs; |
||
| 3849 | } |
||
| 3850 | |||
| 3851 | protected: |
||
| 3852 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 3853 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 3854 | |||
| 3855 | InvokeInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 3856 | |||
| 3857 | public: |
||
| 3858 | static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal, |
||
| 3859 | BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 3860 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 3861 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 3862 | int NumOperands = ComputeNumOperands(Args.size()); |
||
| 3863 | return new (NumOperands) |
||
| 3864 | InvokeInst(Ty, Func, IfNormal, IfException, Args, std::nullopt, |
||
| 3865 | NumOperands, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 3866 | } |
||
| 3867 | |||
| 3868 | static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal, |
||
| 3869 | BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 3870 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = std::nullopt, |
||
| 3871 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 3872 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 3873 | int NumOperands = |
||
| 3874 | ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), CountBundleInputs(Bundles)); |
||
| 3875 | unsigned DescriptorBytes = Bundles.size() * sizeof(BundleOpInfo); |
||
| 3876 | |||
| 3877 | return new (NumOperands, DescriptorBytes) |
||
| 3878 | InvokeInst(Ty, Func, IfNormal, IfException, Args, Bundles, NumOperands, |
||
| 3879 | NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 3880 | } |
||
| 3881 | |||
| 3882 | static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal, |
||
| 3883 | BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 3884 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 3885 | int NumOperands = ComputeNumOperands(Args.size()); |
||
| 3886 | return new (NumOperands) |
||
| 3887 | InvokeInst(Ty, Func, IfNormal, IfException, Args, std::nullopt, |
||
| 3888 | NumOperands, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3889 | } |
||
| 3890 | |||
| 3891 | static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal, |
||
| 3892 | BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 3893 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, |
||
| 3894 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 3895 | int NumOperands = |
||
| 3896 | ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), CountBundleInputs(Bundles)); |
||
| 3897 | unsigned DescriptorBytes = Bundles.size() * sizeof(BundleOpInfo); |
||
| 3898 | |||
| 3899 | return new (NumOperands, DescriptorBytes) |
||
| 3900 | InvokeInst(Ty, Func, IfNormal, IfException, Args, Bundles, NumOperands, |
||
| 3901 | NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3902 | } |
||
| 3903 | |||
| 3904 | static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal, |
||
| 3905 | BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 3906 | const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 3907 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 3908 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), IfNormal, |
||
| 3909 | IfException, Args, std::nullopt, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 3910 | } |
||
| 3911 | |||
| 3912 | static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal, |
||
| 3913 | BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 3914 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = std::nullopt, |
||
| 3915 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 3916 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 3917 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), IfNormal, |
||
| 3918 | IfException, Args, Bundles, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 3919 | } |
||
| 3920 | |||
| 3921 | static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal, |
||
| 3922 | BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 3923 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 3924 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), IfNormal, |
||
| 3925 | IfException, Args, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3926 | } |
||
| 3927 | |||
| 3928 | static InvokeInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal, |
||
| 3929 | BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 3930 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, |
||
| 3931 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 3932 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), IfNormal, |
||
| 3933 | IfException, Args, Bundles, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 3934 | } |
||
| 3935 | |||
| 3936 | /// Create a clone of \p II with a different set of operand bundles and |
||
| 3937 | /// insert it before \p InsertPt. |
||
| 3938 | /// |
||
| 3939 | /// The returned invoke instruction is identical to \p II in every way except |
||
| 3940 | /// that the operand bundles for the new instruction are set to the operand |
||
| 3941 | /// bundles in \p Bundles. |
||
| 3942 | static InvokeInst *Create(InvokeInst *II, ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, |
||
| 3943 | Instruction *InsertPt = nullptr); |
||
| 3944 | |||
| 3945 | // get*Dest - Return the destination basic blocks... |
||
| 3946 | BasicBlock *getNormalDest() const { |
||
| 3947 | return cast<BasicBlock>(Op<NormalDestOpEndIdx>()); |
||
| 3948 | } |
||
| 3949 | BasicBlock *getUnwindDest() const { |
||
| 3950 | return cast<BasicBlock>(Op<UnwindDestOpEndIdx>()); |
||
| 3951 | } |
||
| 3952 | void setNormalDest(BasicBlock *B) { |
||
| 3953 | Op<NormalDestOpEndIdx>() = reinterpret_cast<Value *>(B); |
||
| 3954 | } |
||
| 3955 | void setUnwindDest(BasicBlock *B) { |
||
| 3956 | Op<UnwindDestOpEndIdx>() = reinterpret_cast<Value *>(B); |
||
| 3957 | } |
||
| 3958 | |||
| 3959 | /// Get the landingpad instruction from the landing pad |
||
| 3960 | /// block (the unwind destination). |
||
| 3961 | LandingPadInst *getLandingPadInst() const; |
||
| 3962 | |||
| 3963 | BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned i) const { |
||
| 3964 | assert(i < 2 && "Successor # out of range for invoke!"); |
||
| 3965 | return i == 0 ? getNormalDest() : getUnwindDest(); |
||
| 3966 | } |
||
| 3967 | |||
| 3968 | void setSuccessor(unsigned i, BasicBlock *NewSucc) { |
||
| 3969 | assert(i < 2 && "Successor # out of range for invoke!"); |
||
| 3970 | if (i == 0) |
||
| 3971 | setNormalDest(NewSucc); |
||
| 3972 | else |
||
| 3973 | setUnwindDest(NewSucc); |
||
| 3974 | } |
||
| 3975 | |||
| 3976 | unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return 2; } |
||
| 3977 | |||
| 3978 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 3979 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 3980 | return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Invoke); |
||
| 3981 | } |
||
| 3982 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 3983 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 3984 | } |
||
| 3985 | |||
| 3986 | private: |
||
| 3987 | // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding |
||
| 3988 | // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it. |
||
| 3989 | template <typename Bitfield> |
||
| 3990 | void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) { |
||
| 3991 | Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value); |
||
| 3992 | } |
||
| 3993 | }; |
||
| 3994 | |||
| 3995 | InvokeInst::InvokeInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal, |
||
| 3996 | BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 3997 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands, |
||
| 3998 | const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore) |
||
| 3999 | : CallBase(Ty->getReturnType(), Instruction::Invoke, |
||
| 4000 | OperandTraits<CallBase>::op_end(this) - NumOperands, NumOperands, |
||
| 4001 | InsertBefore) { |
||
| 4002 | init(Ty, Func, IfNormal, IfException, Args, Bundles, NameStr); |
||
| 4003 | } |
||
| 4004 | |||
| 4005 | InvokeInst::InvokeInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *IfNormal, |
||
| 4006 | BasicBlock *IfException, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4007 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands, |
||
| 4008 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) |
||
| 4009 | : CallBase(Ty->getReturnType(), Instruction::Invoke, |
||
| 4010 | OperandTraits<CallBase>::op_end(this) - NumOperands, NumOperands, |
||
| 4011 | InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 4012 | init(Ty, Func, IfNormal, IfException, Args, Bundles, NameStr); |
||
| 4013 | } |
||
| 4014 | |||
| 4015 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4016 | // CallBrInst Class |
||
| 4017 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4018 | |||
| 4019 | /// CallBr instruction, tracking function calls that may not return control but |
||
| 4020 | /// instead transfer it to a third location. The SubclassData field is used to |
||
| 4021 | /// hold the calling convention of the call. |
||
| 4022 | /// |
||
| 4023 | class CallBrInst : public CallBase { |
||
| 4024 | |||
| 4025 | unsigned NumIndirectDests; |
||
| 4026 | |||
| 4027 | CallBrInst(const CallBrInst &BI); |
||
| 4028 | |||
| 4029 | /// Construct a CallBrInst given a range of arguments. |
||
| 4030 | /// |
||
| 4031 | /// Construct a CallBrInst from a range of arguments |
||
| 4032 | inline CallBrInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest, |
||
| 4033 | ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, |
||
| 4034 | ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4035 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands, |
||
| 4036 | const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 4037 | |||
| 4038 | inline CallBrInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest, |
||
| 4039 | ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, |
||
| 4040 | ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4041 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands, |
||
| 4042 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4043 | |||
| 4044 | void init(FunctionType *FTy, Value *Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest, |
||
| 4045 | ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4046 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, const Twine &NameStr); |
||
| 4047 | |||
| 4048 | /// Compute the number of operands to allocate. |
||
| 4049 | static int ComputeNumOperands(int NumArgs, int NumIndirectDests, |
||
| 4050 | int NumBundleInputs = 0) { |
||
| 4051 | // We need one operand for the called function, plus our extra operands and |
||
| 4052 | // the input operand counts provided. |
||
| 4053 | return 2 + NumIndirectDests + NumArgs + NumBundleInputs; |
||
| 4054 | } |
||
| 4055 | |||
| 4056 | protected: |
||
| 4057 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 4058 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 4059 | |||
| 4060 | CallBrInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 4061 | |||
| 4062 | public: |
||
| 4063 | static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, |
||
| 4064 | BasicBlock *DefaultDest, |
||
| 4065 | ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, |
||
| 4066 | ArrayRef<Value *> Args, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 4067 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 4068 | int NumOperands = ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), IndirectDests.size()); |
||
| 4069 | return new (NumOperands) |
||
| 4070 | CallBrInst(Ty, Func, DefaultDest, IndirectDests, Args, std::nullopt, |
||
| 4071 | NumOperands, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 4072 | } |
||
| 4073 | |||
| 4074 | static CallBrInst * |
||
| 4075 | Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest, |
||
| 4076 | ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4077 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = std::nullopt, |
||
| 4078 | const Twine &NameStr = "", Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 4079 | int NumOperands = ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), IndirectDests.size(), |
||
| 4080 | CountBundleInputs(Bundles)); |
||
| 4081 | unsigned DescriptorBytes = Bundles.size() * sizeof(BundleOpInfo); |
||
| 4082 | |||
| 4083 | return new (NumOperands, DescriptorBytes) |
||
| 4084 | CallBrInst(Ty, Func, DefaultDest, IndirectDests, Args, Bundles, |
||
| 4085 | NumOperands, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 4086 | } |
||
| 4087 | |||
| 4088 | static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, |
||
| 4089 | BasicBlock *DefaultDest, |
||
| 4090 | ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, |
||
| 4091 | ArrayRef<Value *> Args, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 4092 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 4093 | int NumOperands = ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), IndirectDests.size()); |
||
| 4094 | return new (NumOperands) |
||
| 4095 | CallBrInst(Ty, Func, DefaultDest, IndirectDests, Args, std::nullopt, |
||
| 4096 | NumOperands, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4097 | } |
||
| 4098 | |||
| 4099 | static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, |
||
| 4100 | BasicBlock *DefaultDest, |
||
| 4101 | ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, |
||
| 4102 | ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4103 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, |
||
| 4104 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 4105 | int NumOperands = ComputeNumOperands(Args.size(), IndirectDests.size(), |
||
| 4106 | CountBundleInputs(Bundles)); |
||
| 4107 | unsigned DescriptorBytes = Bundles.size() * sizeof(BundleOpInfo); |
||
| 4108 | |||
| 4109 | return new (NumOperands, DescriptorBytes) |
||
| 4110 | CallBrInst(Ty, Func, DefaultDest, IndirectDests, Args, Bundles, |
||
| 4111 | NumOperands, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4112 | } |
||
| 4113 | |||
| 4114 | static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest, |
||
| 4115 | ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, |
||
| 4116 | ArrayRef<Value *> Args, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 4117 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 4118 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), DefaultDest, |
||
| 4119 | IndirectDests, Args, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 4120 | } |
||
| 4121 | |||
| 4122 | static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest, |
||
| 4123 | ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, |
||
| 4124 | ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4125 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles = std::nullopt, |
||
| 4126 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 4127 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 4128 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), DefaultDest, |
||
| 4129 | IndirectDests, Args, Bundles, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 4130 | } |
||
| 4131 | |||
| 4132 | static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest, |
||
| 4133 | ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, |
||
| 4134 | ArrayRef<Value *> Args, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 4135 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 4136 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), DefaultDest, |
||
| 4137 | IndirectDests, Args, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4138 | } |
||
| 4139 | |||
| 4140 | static CallBrInst *Create(FunctionCallee Func, |
||
| 4141 | BasicBlock *DefaultDest, |
||
| 4142 | ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, |
||
| 4143 | ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4144 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, |
||
| 4145 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 4146 | return Create(Func.getFunctionType(), Func.getCallee(), DefaultDest, |
||
| 4147 | IndirectDests, Args, Bundles, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4148 | } |
||
| 4149 | |||
| 4150 | /// Create a clone of \p CBI with a different set of operand bundles and |
||
| 4151 | /// insert it before \p InsertPt. |
||
| 4152 | /// |
||
| 4153 | /// The returned callbr instruction is identical to \p CBI in every way |
||
| 4154 | /// except that the operand bundles for the new instruction are set to the |
||
| 4155 | /// operand bundles in \p Bundles. |
||
| 4156 | static CallBrInst *Create(CallBrInst *CBI, |
||
| 4157 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, |
||
| 4158 | Instruction *InsertPt = nullptr); |
||
| 4159 | |||
| 4160 | /// Return the number of callbr indirect dest labels. |
||
| 4161 | /// |
||
| 4162 | unsigned getNumIndirectDests() const { return NumIndirectDests; } |
||
| 4163 | |||
| 4164 | /// getIndirectDestLabel - Return the i-th indirect dest label. |
||
| 4165 | /// |
||
| 4166 | Value *getIndirectDestLabel(unsigned i) const { |
||
| 4167 | assert(i < getNumIndirectDests() && "Out of bounds!"); |
||
| 4168 | return getOperand(i + arg_size() + getNumTotalBundleOperands() + 1); |
||
| 4169 | } |
||
| 4170 | |||
| 4171 | Value *getIndirectDestLabelUse(unsigned i) const { |
||
| 4172 | assert(i < getNumIndirectDests() && "Out of bounds!"); |
||
| 4173 | return getOperandUse(i + arg_size() + getNumTotalBundleOperands() + 1); |
||
| 4174 | } |
||
| 4175 | |||
| 4176 | // Return the destination basic blocks... |
||
| 4177 | BasicBlock *getDefaultDest() const { |
||
| 4178 | return cast<BasicBlock>(*(&Op<-1>() - getNumIndirectDests() - 1)); |
||
| 4179 | } |
||
| 4180 | BasicBlock *getIndirectDest(unsigned i) const { |
||
| 4181 | return cast_or_null<BasicBlock>(*(&Op<-1>() - getNumIndirectDests() + i)); |
||
| 4182 | } |
||
| 4183 | SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> getIndirectDests() const { |
||
| 4184 | SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> IndirectDests; |
||
| 4185 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = getNumIndirectDests(); i < e; ++i) |
||
| 4186 | IndirectDests.push_back(getIndirectDest(i)); |
||
| 4187 | return IndirectDests; |
||
| 4188 | } |
||
| 4189 | void setDefaultDest(BasicBlock *B) { |
||
| 4190 | *(&Op<-1>() - getNumIndirectDests() - 1) = reinterpret_cast<Value *>(B); |
||
| 4191 | } |
||
| 4192 | void setIndirectDest(unsigned i, BasicBlock *B) { |
||
| 4193 | *(&Op<-1>() - getNumIndirectDests() + i) = reinterpret_cast<Value *>(B); |
||
| 4194 | } |
||
| 4195 | |||
| 4196 | BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned i) const { |
||
| 4197 | assert(i < getNumSuccessors() + 1 && |
||
| 4198 | "Successor # out of range for callbr!"); |
||
| 4199 | return i == 0 ? getDefaultDest() : getIndirectDest(i - 1); |
||
| 4200 | } |
||
| 4201 | |||
| 4202 | void setSuccessor(unsigned i, BasicBlock *NewSucc) { |
||
| 4203 | assert(i < getNumIndirectDests() + 1 && |
||
| 4204 | "Successor # out of range for callbr!"); |
||
| 4205 | return i == 0 ? setDefaultDest(NewSucc) : setIndirectDest(i - 1, NewSucc); |
||
| 4206 | } |
||
| 4207 | |||
| 4208 | unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return getNumIndirectDests() + 1; } |
||
| 4209 | |||
| 4210 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 4211 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 4212 | return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::CallBr); |
||
| 4213 | } |
||
| 4214 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4215 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 4216 | } |
||
| 4217 | |||
| 4218 | private: |
||
| 4219 | // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding |
||
| 4220 | // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it. |
||
| 4221 | template <typename Bitfield> |
||
| 4222 | void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) { |
||
| 4223 | Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value); |
||
| 4224 | } |
||
| 4225 | }; |
||
| 4226 | |||
| 4227 | CallBrInst::CallBrInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest, |
||
| 4228 | ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, |
||
| 4229 | ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4230 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands, |
||
| 4231 | const Twine &NameStr, Instruction *InsertBefore) |
||
| 4232 | : CallBase(Ty->getReturnType(), Instruction::CallBr, |
||
| 4233 | OperandTraits<CallBase>::op_end(this) - NumOperands, NumOperands, |
||
| 4234 | InsertBefore) { |
||
| 4235 | init(Ty, Func, DefaultDest, IndirectDests, Args, Bundles, NameStr); |
||
| 4236 | } |
||
| 4237 | |||
| 4238 | CallBrInst::CallBrInst(FunctionType *Ty, Value *Func, BasicBlock *DefaultDest, |
||
| 4239 | ArrayRef<BasicBlock *> IndirectDests, |
||
| 4240 | ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4241 | ArrayRef<OperandBundleDef> Bundles, int NumOperands, |
||
| 4242 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) |
||
| 4243 | : CallBase(Ty->getReturnType(), Instruction::CallBr, |
||
| 4244 | OperandTraits<CallBase>::op_end(this) - NumOperands, NumOperands, |
||
| 4245 | InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 4246 | init(Ty, Func, DefaultDest, IndirectDests, Args, Bundles, NameStr); |
||
| 4247 | } |
||
| 4248 | |||
| 4249 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4250 | // ResumeInst Class |
||
| 4251 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4252 | |||
| 4253 | //===--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
||
| 4254 | /// Resume the propagation of an exception. |
||
| 4255 | /// |
||
| 4256 | class ResumeInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 4257 | ResumeInst(const ResumeInst &RI); |
||
| 4258 | |||
| 4259 | explicit ResumeInst(Value *Exn, Instruction *InsertBefore=nullptr); |
||
| 4260 | ResumeInst(Value *Exn, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4261 | |||
| 4262 | protected: |
||
| 4263 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 4264 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 4265 | |||
| 4266 | ResumeInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 4267 | |||
| 4268 | public: |
||
| 4269 | static ResumeInst *Create(Value *Exn, Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 4270 | return new(1) ResumeInst(Exn, InsertBefore); |
||
| 4271 | } |
||
| 4272 | |||
| 4273 | static ResumeInst *Create(Value *Exn, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 4274 | return new(1) ResumeInst(Exn, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4275 | } |
||
| 4276 | |||
| 4277 | /// Provide fast operand accessors |
||
| 4278 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 4279 | |||
| 4280 | /// Convenience accessor. |
||
| 4281 | Value *getValue() const { return Op<0>(); } |
||
| 4282 | |||
| 4283 | unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return 0; } |
||
| 4284 | |||
| 4285 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 4286 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 4287 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Resume; |
||
| 4288 | } |
||
| 4289 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4290 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 4291 | } |
||
| 4292 | |||
| 4293 | private: |
||
| 4294 | BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned idx) const { |
||
| 4295 | llvm_unreachable("ResumeInst has no successors!"); |
||
| 4296 | } |
||
| 4297 | |||
| 4298 | void setSuccessor(unsigned idx, BasicBlock *NewSucc) { |
||
| 4299 | llvm_unreachable("ResumeInst has no successors!"); |
||
| 4300 | } |
||
| 4301 | }; |
||
| 4302 | |||
| 4303 | template <> |
||
| 4304 | struct OperandTraits<ResumeInst> : |
||
| 4305 | public FixedNumOperandTraits<ResumeInst, 1> { |
||
| 4306 | }; |
||
| 4307 | |||
| 4308 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(ResumeInst, Value) |
||
| 4309 | |||
| 4310 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4311 | // CatchSwitchInst Class |
||
| 4312 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4313 | class CatchSwitchInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 4314 | using UnwindDestField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>; |
||
| 4315 | |||
| 4316 | /// The number of operands actually allocated. NumOperands is |
||
| 4317 | /// the number actually in use. |
||
| 4318 | unsigned ReservedSpace; |
||
| 4319 | |||
| 4320 | // Operand[0] = Outer scope |
||
| 4321 | // Operand[1] = Unwind block destination |
||
| 4322 | // Operand[n] = BasicBlock to go to on match |
||
| 4323 | CatchSwitchInst(const CatchSwitchInst &CSI); |
||
| 4324 | |||
| 4325 | /// Create a new switch instruction, specifying a |
||
| 4326 | /// default destination. The number of additional handlers can be specified |
||
| 4327 | /// here to make memory allocation more efficient. |
||
| 4328 | /// This constructor can also autoinsert before another instruction. |
||
| 4329 | CatchSwitchInst(Value *ParentPad, BasicBlock *UnwindDest, |
||
| 4330 | unsigned NumHandlers, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 4331 | Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 4332 | |||
| 4333 | /// Create a new switch instruction, specifying a |
||
| 4334 | /// default destination. The number of additional handlers can be specified |
||
| 4335 | /// here to make memory allocation more efficient. |
||
| 4336 | /// This constructor also autoinserts at the end of the specified BasicBlock. |
||
| 4337 | CatchSwitchInst(Value *ParentPad, BasicBlock *UnwindDest, |
||
| 4338 | unsigned NumHandlers, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 4339 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4340 | |||
| 4341 | // allocate space for exactly zero operands |
||
| 4342 | void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S); } |
||
| 4343 | |||
| 4344 | void init(Value *ParentPad, BasicBlock *UnwindDest, unsigned NumReserved); |
||
| 4345 | void growOperands(unsigned Size); |
||
| 4346 | |||
| 4347 | protected: |
||
| 4348 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 4349 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 4350 | |||
| 4351 | CatchSwitchInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 4352 | |||
| 4353 | public: |
||
| 4354 | void operator delete(void *Ptr) { return User::operator delete(Ptr); } |
||
| 4355 | |||
| 4356 | static CatchSwitchInst *Create(Value *ParentPad, BasicBlock *UnwindDest, |
||
| 4357 | unsigned NumHandlers, |
||
| 4358 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 4359 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 4360 | return new CatchSwitchInst(ParentPad, UnwindDest, NumHandlers, NameStr, |
||
| 4361 | InsertBefore); |
||
| 4362 | } |
||
| 4363 | |||
| 4364 | static CatchSwitchInst *Create(Value *ParentPad, BasicBlock *UnwindDest, |
||
| 4365 | unsigned NumHandlers, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 4366 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 4367 | return new CatchSwitchInst(ParentPad, UnwindDest, NumHandlers, NameStr, |
||
| 4368 | InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4369 | } |
||
| 4370 | |||
| 4371 | /// Provide fast operand accessors |
||
| 4372 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 4373 | |||
| 4374 | // Accessor Methods for CatchSwitch stmt |
||
| 4375 | Value *getParentPad() const { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 4376 | void setParentPad(Value *ParentPad) { setOperand(0, ParentPad); } |
||
| 4377 | |||
| 4378 | // Accessor Methods for CatchSwitch stmt |
||
| 4379 | bool hasUnwindDest() const { return getSubclassData<UnwindDestField>(); } |
||
| 4380 | bool unwindsToCaller() const { return !hasUnwindDest(); } |
||
| 4381 | BasicBlock *getUnwindDest() const { |
||
| 4382 | if (hasUnwindDest()) |
||
| 4383 | return cast<BasicBlock>(getOperand(1)); |
||
| 4384 | return nullptr; |
||
| 4385 | } |
||
| 4386 | void setUnwindDest(BasicBlock *UnwindDest) { |
||
| 4387 | assert(UnwindDest); |
||
| 4388 | assert(hasUnwindDest()); |
||
| 4389 | setOperand(1, UnwindDest); |
||
| 4390 | } |
||
| 4391 | |||
| 4392 | /// return the number of 'handlers' in this catchswitch |
||
| 4393 | /// instruction, except the default handler |
||
| 4394 | unsigned getNumHandlers() const { |
||
| 4395 | if (hasUnwindDest()) |
||
| 4396 | return getNumOperands() - 2; |
||
| 4397 | return getNumOperands() - 1; |
||
| 4398 | } |
||
| 4399 | |||
| 4400 | private: |
||
| 4401 | static BasicBlock *handler_helper(Value *V) { return cast<BasicBlock>(V); } |
||
| 4402 | static const BasicBlock *handler_helper(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4403 | return cast<BasicBlock>(V); |
||
| 4404 | } |
||
| 4405 | |||
| 4406 | public: |
||
| 4407 | using DerefFnTy = BasicBlock *(*)(Value *); |
||
| 4408 | using handler_iterator = mapped_iterator<op_iterator, DerefFnTy>; |
||
| 4409 | using handler_range = iterator_range<handler_iterator>; |
||
| 4410 | using ConstDerefFnTy = const BasicBlock *(*)(const Value *); |
||
| 4411 | using const_handler_iterator = |
||
| 4412 | mapped_iterator<const_op_iterator, ConstDerefFnTy>; |
||
| 4413 | using const_handler_range = iterator_range<const_handler_iterator>; |
||
| 4414 | |||
| 4415 | /// Returns an iterator that points to the first handler in CatchSwitchInst. |
||
| 4416 | handler_iterator handler_begin() { |
||
| 4417 | op_iterator It = op_begin() + 1; |
||
| 4418 | if (hasUnwindDest()) |
||
| 4419 | ++It; |
||
| 4420 | return handler_iterator(It, DerefFnTy(handler_helper)); |
||
| 4421 | } |
||
| 4422 | |||
| 4423 | /// Returns an iterator that points to the first handler in the |
||
| 4424 | /// CatchSwitchInst. |
||
| 4425 | const_handler_iterator handler_begin() const { |
||
| 4426 | const_op_iterator It = op_begin() + 1; |
||
| 4427 | if (hasUnwindDest()) |
||
| 4428 | ++It; |
||
| 4429 | return const_handler_iterator(It, ConstDerefFnTy(handler_helper)); |
||
| 4430 | } |
||
| 4431 | |||
| 4432 | /// Returns a read-only iterator that points one past the last |
||
| 4433 | /// handler in the CatchSwitchInst. |
||
| 4434 | handler_iterator handler_end() { |
||
| 4435 | return handler_iterator(op_end(), DerefFnTy(handler_helper)); |
||
| 4436 | } |
||
| 4437 | |||
| 4438 | /// Returns an iterator that points one past the last handler in the |
||
| 4439 | /// CatchSwitchInst. |
||
| 4440 | const_handler_iterator handler_end() const { |
||
| 4441 | return const_handler_iterator(op_end(), ConstDerefFnTy(handler_helper)); |
||
| 4442 | } |
||
| 4443 | |||
| 4444 | /// iteration adapter for range-for loops. |
||
| 4445 | handler_range handlers() { |
||
| 4446 | return make_range(handler_begin(), handler_end()); |
||
| 4447 | } |
||
| 4448 | |||
| 4449 | /// iteration adapter for range-for loops. |
||
| 4450 | const_handler_range handlers() const { |
||
| 4451 | return make_range(handler_begin(), handler_end()); |
||
| 4452 | } |
||
| 4453 | |||
| 4454 | /// Add an entry to the switch instruction... |
||
| 4455 | /// Note: |
||
| 4456 | /// This action invalidates handler_end(). Old handler_end() iterator will |
||
| 4457 | /// point to the added handler. |
||
| 4458 | void addHandler(BasicBlock *Dest); |
||
| 4459 | |||
| 4460 | void removeHandler(handler_iterator HI); |
||
| 4461 | |||
| 4462 | unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return getNumOperands() - 1; } |
||
| 4463 | BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned Idx) const { |
||
| 4464 | assert(Idx < getNumSuccessors() && |
||
| 4465 | "Successor # out of range for catchswitch!"); |
||
| 4466 | return cast<BasicBlock>(getOperand(Idx + 1)); |
||
| 4467 | } |
||
| 4468 | void setSuccessor(unsigned Idx, BasicBlock *NewSucc) { |
||
| 4469 | assert(Idx < getNumSuccessors() && |
||
| 4470 | "Successor # out of range for catchswitch!"); |
||
| 4471 | setOperand(Idx + 1, NewSucc); |
||
| 4472 | } |
||
| 4473 | |||
| 4474 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 4475 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 4476 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::CatchSwitch; |
||
| 4477 | } |
||
| 4478 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4479 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 4480 | } |
||
| 4481 | }; |
||
| 4482 | |||
| 4483 | template <> |
||
| 4484 | struct OperandTraits<CatchSwitchInst> : public HungoffOperandTraits<2> {}; |
||
| 4485 | |||
| 4486 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(CatchSwitchInst, Value) |
||
| 4487 | |||
| 4488 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4489 | // CleanupPadInst Class |
||
| 4490 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4491 | class CleanupPadInst : public FuncletPadInst { |
||
| 4492 | private: |
||
| 4493 | explicit CleanupPadInst(Value *ParentPad, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4494 | unsigned Values, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 4495 | Instruction *InsertBefore) |
||
| 4496 | : FuncletPadInst(Instruction::CleanupPad, ParentPad, Args, Values, |
||
| 4497 | NameStr, InsertBefore) {} |
||
| 4498 | explicit CleanupPadInst(Value *ParentPad, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4499 | unsigned Values, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 4500 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) |
||
| 4501 | : FuncletPadInst(Instruction::CleanupPad, ParentPad, Args, Values, |
||
| 4502 | NameStr, InsertAtEnd) {} |
||
| 4503 | |||
| 4504 | public: |
||
| 4505 | static CleanupPadInst *Create(Value *ParentPad, |
||
| 4506 | ArrayRef<Value *> Args = std::nullopt, |
||
| 4507 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 4508 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 4509 | unsigned Values = 1 + Args.size(); |
||
| 4510 | return new (Values) |
||
| 4511 | CleanupPadInst(ParentPad, Args, Values, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 4512 | } |
||
| 4513 | |||
| 4514 | static CleanupPadInst *Create(Value *ParentPad, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4515 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 4516 | unsigned Values = 1 + Args.size(); |
||
| 4517 | return new (Values) |
||
| 4518 | CleanupPadInst(ParentPad, Args, Values, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4519 | } |
||
| 4520 | |||
| 4521 | /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 4522 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 4523 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::CleanupPad; |
||
| 4524 | } |
||
| 4525 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4526 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 4527 | } |
||
| 4528 | }; |
||
| 4529 | |||
| 4530 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4531 | // CatchPadInst Class |
||
| 4532 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4533 | class CatchPadInst : public FuncletPadInst { |
||
| 4534 | private: |
||
| 4535 | explicit CatchPadInst(Value *CatchSwitch, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4536 | unsigned Values, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 4537 | Instruction *InsertBefore) |
||
| 4538 | : FuncletPadInst(Instruction::CatchPad, CatchSwitch, Args, Values, |
||
| 4539 | NameStr, InsertBefore) {} |
||
| 4540 | explicit CatchPadInst(Value *CatchSwitch, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4541 | unsigned Values, const Twine &NameStr, |
||
| 4542 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) |
||
| 4543 | : FuncletPadInst(Instruction::CatchPad, CatchSwitch, Args, Values, |
||
| 4544 | NameStr, InsertAtEnd) {} |
||
| 4545 | |||
| 4546 | public: |
||
| 4547 | static CatchPadInst *Create(Value *CatchSwitch, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4548 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 4549 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 4550 | unsigned Values = 1 + Args.size(); |
||
| 4551 | return new (Values) |
||
| 4552 | CatchPadInst(CatchSwitch, Args, Values, NameStr, InsertBefore); |
||
| 4553 | } |
||
| 4554 | |||
| 4555 | static CatchPadInst *Create(Value *CatchSwitch, ArrayRef<Value *> Args, |
||
| 4556 | const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 4557 | unsigned Values = 1 + Args.size(); |
||
| 4558 | return new (Values) |
||
| 4559 | CatchPadInst(CatchSwitch, Args, Values, NameStr, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4560 | } |
||
| 4561 | |||
| 4562 | /// Convenience accessors |
||
| 4563 | CatchSwitchInst *getCatchSwitch() const { |
||
| 4564 | return cast<CatchSwitchInst>(Op<-1>()); |
||
| 4565 | } |
||
| 4566 | void setCatchSwitch(Value *CatchSwitch) { |
||
| 4567 | assert(CatchSwitch); |
||
| 4568 | Op<-1>() = CatchSwitch; |
||
| 4569 | } |
||
| 4570 | |||
| 4571 | /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 4572 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 4573 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::CatchPad; |
||
| 4574 | } |
||
| 4575 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4576 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 4577 | } |
||
| 4578 | }; |
||
| 4579 | |||
| 4580 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4581 | // CatchReturnInst Class |
||
| 4582 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4583 | |||
| 4584 | class CatchReturnInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 4585 | CatchReturnInst(const CatchReturnInst &RI); |
||
| 4586 | CatchReturnInst(Value *CatchPad, BasicBlock *BB, Instruction *InsertBefore); |
||
| 4587 | CatchReturnInst(Value *CatchPad, BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4588 | |||
| 4589 | void init(Value *CatchPad, BasicBlock *BB); |
||
| 4590 | |||
| 4591 | protected: |
||
| 4592 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 4593 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 4594 | |||
| 4595 | CatchReturnInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 4596 | |||
| 4597 | public: |
||
| 4598 | static CatchReturnInst *Create(Value *CatchPad, BasicBlock *BB, |
||
| 4599 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 4600 | assert(CatchPad); |
||
| 4601 | assert(BB); |
||
| 4602 | return new (2) CatchReturnInst(CatchPad, BB, InsertBefore); |
||
| 4603 | } |
||
| 4604 | |||
| 4605 | static CatchReturnInst *Create(Value *CatchPad, BasicBlock *BB, |
||
| 4606 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 4607 | assert(CatchPad); |
||
| 4608 | assert(BB); |
||
| 4609 | return new (2) CatchReturnInst(CatchPad, BB, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4610 | } |
||
| 4611 | |||
| 4612 | /// Provide fast operand accessors |
||
| 4613 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 4614 | |||
| 4615 | /// Convenience accessors. |
||
| 4616 | CatchPadInst *getCatchPad() const { return cast<CatchPadInst>(Op<0>()); } |
||
| 4617 | void setCatchPad(CatchPadInst *CatchPad) { |
||
| 4618 | assert(CatchPad); |
||
| 4619 | Op<0>() = CatchPad; |
||
| 4620 | } |
||
| 4621 | |||
| 4622 | BasicBlock *getSuccessor() const { return cast<BasicBlock>(Op<1>()); } |
||
| 4623 | void setSuccessor(BasicBlock *NewSucc) { |
||
| 4624 | assert(NewSucc); |
||
| 4625 | Op<1>() = NewSucc; |
||
| 4626 | } |
||
| 4627 | unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return 1; } |
||
| 4628 | |||
| 4629 | /// Get the parentPad of this catchret's catchpad's catchswitch. |
||
| 4630 | /// The successor block is implicitly a member of this funclet. |
||
| 4631 | Value *getCatchSwitchParentPad() const { |
||
| 4632 | return getCatchPad()->getCatchSwitch()->getParentPad(); |
||
| 4633 | } |
||
| 4634 | |||
| 4635 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 4636 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 4637 | return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::CatchRet); |
||
| 4638 | } |
||
| 4639 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4640 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 4641 | } |
||
| 4642 | |||
| 4643 | private: |
||
| 4644 | BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned Idx) const { |
||
| 4645 | assert(Idx < getNumSuccessors() && "Successor # out of range for catchret!"); |
||
| 4646 | return getSuccessor(); |
||
| 4647 | } |
||
| 4648 | |||
| 4649 | void setSuccessor(unsigned Idx, BasicBlock *B) { |
||
| 4650 | assert(Idx < getNumSuccessors() && "Successor # out of range for catchret!"); |
||
| 4651 | setSuccessor(B); |
||
| 4652 | } |
||
| 4653 | }; |
||
| 4654 | |||
| 4655 | template <> |
||
| 4656 | struct OperandTraits<CatchReturnInst> |
||
| 4657 | : public FixedNumOperandTraits<CatchReturnInst, 2> {}; |
||
| 4658 | |||
| 4659 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(CatchReturnInst, Value) |
||
| 4660 | |||
| 4661 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4662 | // CleanupReturnInst Class |
||
| 4663 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4664 | |||
| 4665 | class CleanupReturnInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 4666 | using UnwindDestField = BoolBitfieldElementT<0>; |
||
| 4667 | |||
| 4668 | private: |
||
| 4669 | CleanupReturnInst(const CleanupReturnInst &RI); |
||
| 4670 | CleanupReturnInst(Value *CleanupPad, BasicBlock *UnwindBB, unsigned Values, |
||
| 4671 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 4672 | CleanupReturnInst(Value *CleanupPad, BasicBlock *UnwindBB, unsigned Values, |
||
| 4673 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4674 | |||
| 4675 | void init(Value *CleanupPad, BasicBlock *UnwindBB); |
||
| 4676 | |||
| 4677 | protected: |
||
| 4678 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 4679 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 4680 | |||
| 4681 | CleanupReturnInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 4682 | |||
| 4683 | public: |
||
| 4684 | static CleanupReturnInst *Create(Value *CleanupPad, |
||
| 4685 | BasicBlock *UnwindBB = nullptr, |
||
| 4686 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr) { |
||
| 4687 | assert(CleanupPad); |
||
| 4688 | unsigned Values = 1; |
||
| 4689 | if (UnwindBB) |
||
| 4690 | ++Values; |
||
| 4691 | return new (Values) |
||
| 4692 | CleanupReturnInst(CleanupPad, UnwindBB, Values, InsertBefore); |
||
| 4693 | } |
||
| 4694 | |||
| 4695 | static CleanupReturnInst *Create(Value *CleanupPad, BasicBlock *UnwindBB, |
||
| 4696 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd) { |
||
| 4697 | assert(CleanupPad); |
||
| 4698 | unsigned Values = 1; |
||
| 4699 | if (UnwindBB) |
||
| 4700 | ++Values; |
||
| 4701 | return new (Values) |
||
| 4702 | CleanupReturnInst(CleanupPad, UnwindBB, Values, InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4703 | } |
||
| 4704 | |||
| 4705 | /// Provide fast operand accessors |
||
| 4706 | DECLARE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(Value); |
||
| 4707 | |||
| 4708 | bool hasUnwindDest() const { return getSubclassData<UnwindDestField>(); } |
||
| 4709 | bool unwindsToCaller() const { return !hasUnwindDest(); } |
||
| 4710 | |||
| 4711 | /// Convenience accessor. |
||
| 4712 | CleanupPadInst *getCleanupPad() const { |
||
| 4713 | return cast<CleanupPadInst>(Op<0>()); |
||
| 4714 | } |
||
| 4715 | void setCleanupPad(CleanupPadInst *CleanupPad) { |
||
| 4716 | assert(CleanupPad); |
||
| 4717 | Op<0>() = CleanupPad; |
||
| 4718 | } |
||
| 4719 | |||
| 4720 | unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return hasUnwindDest() ? 1 : 0; } |
||
| 4721 | |||
| 4722 | BasicBlock *getUnwindDest() const { |
||
| 4723 | return hasUnwindDest() ? cast<BasicBlock>(Op<1>()) : nullptr; |
||
| 4724 | } |
||
| 4725 | void setUnwindDest(BasicBlock *NewDest) { |
||
| 4726 | assert(NewDest); |
||
| 4727 | assert(hasUnwindDest()); |
||
| 4728 | Op<1>() = NewDest; |
||
| 4729 | } |
||
| 4730 | |||
| 4731 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 4732 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 4733 | return (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::CleanupRet); |
||
| 4734 | } |
||
| 4735 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4736 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 4737 | } |
||
| 4738 | |||
| 4739 | private: |
||
| 4740 | BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned Idx) const { |
||
| 4741 | assert(Idx == 0); |
||
| 4742 | return getUnwindDest(); |
||
| 4743 | } |
||
| 4744 | |||
| 4745 | void setSuccessor(unsigned Idx, BasicBlock *B) { |
||
| 4746 | assert(Idx == 0); |
||
| 4747 | setUnwindDest(B); |
||
| 4748 | } |
||
| 4749 | |||
| 4750 | // Shadow Instruction::setInstructionSubclassData with a private forwarding |
||
| 4751 | // method so that subclasses cannot accidentally use it. |
||
| 4752 | template <typename Bitfield> |
||
| 4753 | void setSubclassData(typename Bitfield::Type Value) { |
||
| 4754 | Instruction::setSubclassData<Bitfield>(Value); |
||
| 4755 | } |
||
| 4756 | }; |
||
| 4757 | |||
| 4758 | template <> |
||
| 4759 | struct OperandTraits<CleanupReturnInst> |
||
| 4760 | : public VariadicOperandTraits<CleanupReturnInst, /*MINARITY=*/1> {}; |
||
| 4761 | |||
| 4762 | DEFINE_TRANSPARENT_OPERAND_ACCESSORS(CleanupReturnInst, Value) |
||
| 4763 | |||
| 4764 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4765 | // UnreachableInst Class |
||
| 4766 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4767 | |||
| 4768 | //===--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
||
| 4769 | /// This function has undefined behavior. In particular, the |
||
| 4770 | /// presence of this instruction indicates some higher level knowledge that the |
||
| 4771 | /// end of the block cannot be reached. |
||
| 4772 | /// |
||
| 4773 | class UnreachableInst : public Instruction { |
||
| 4774 | protected: |
||
| 4775 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 4776 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 4777 | |||
| 4778 | UnreachableInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 4779 | |||
| 4780 | public: |
||
| 4781 | explicit UnreachableInst(LLVMContext &C, Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 4782 | explicit UnreachableInst(LLVMContext &C, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 4783 | |||
| 4784 | // allocate space for exactly zero operands |
||
| 4785 | void *operator new(size_t S) { return User::operator new(S, 0); } |
||
| 4786 | void operator delete(void *Ptr) { User::operator delete(Ptr); } |
||
| 4787 | |||
| 4788 | unsigned getNumSuccessors() const { return 0; } |
||
| 4789 | |||
| 4790 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 4791 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 4792 | return I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Unreachable; |
||
| 4793 | } |
||
| 4794 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4795 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 4796 | } |
||
| 4797 | |||
| 4798 | private: |
||
| 4799 | BasicBlock *getSuccessor(unsigned idx) const { |
||
| 4800 | llvm_unreachable("UnreachableInst has no successors!"); |
||
| 4801 | } |
||
| 4802 | |||
| 4803 | void setSuccessor(unsigned idx, BasicBlock *B) { |
||
| 4804 | llvm_unreachable("UnreachableInst has no successors!"); |
||
| 4805 | } |
||
| 4806 | }; |
||
| 4807 | |||
| 4808 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4809 | // TruncInst Class |
||
| 4810 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4811 | |||
| 4812 | /// This class represents a truncation of integer types. |
||
| 4813 | class TruncInst : public CastInst { |
||
| 4814 | protected: |
||
| 4815 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 4816 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 4817 | |||
| 4818 | /// Clone an identical TruncInst |
||
| 4819 | TruncInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 4820 | |||
| 4821 | public: |
||
| 4822 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 4823 | TruncInst( |
||
| 4824 | Value *S, ///< The value to be truncated |
||
| 4825 | Type *Ty, ///< The (smaller) type to truncate to |
||
| 4826 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 4827 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 4828 | ); |
||
| 4829 | |||
| 4830 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics |
||
| 4831 | TruncInst( |
||
| 4832 | Value *S, ///< The value to be truncated |
||
| 4833 | Type *Ty, ///< The (smaller) type to truncate to |
||
| 4834 | const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 4835 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into |
||
| 4836 | ); |
||
| 4837 | |||
| 4838 | /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 4839 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 4840 | return I->getOpcode() == Trunc; |
||
| 4841 | } |
||
| 4842 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4843 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 4844 | } |
||
| 4845 | }; |
||
| 4846 | |||
| 4847 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4848 | // ZExtInst Class |
||
| 4849 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4850 | |||
| 4851 | /// This class represents zero extension of integer types. |
||
| 4852 | class ZExtInst : public CastInst { |
||
| 4853 | protected: |
||
| 4854 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 4855 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 4856 | |||
| 4857 | /// Clone an identical ZExtInst |
||
| 4858 | ZExtInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 4859 | |||
| 4860 | public: |
||
| 4861 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 4862 | ZExtInst( |
||
| 4863 | Value *S, ///< The value to be zero extended |
||
| 4864 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to zero extend to |
||
| 4865 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 4866 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 4867 | ); |
||
| 4868 | |||
| 4869 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end semantics. |
||
| 4870 | ZExtInst( |
||
| 4871 | Value *S, ///< The value to be zero extended |
||
| 4872 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to zero extend to |
||
| 4873 | const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 4874 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into |
||
| 4875 | ); |
||
| 4876 | |||
| 4877 | /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 4878 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 4879 | return I->getOpcode() == ZExt; |
||
| 4880 | } |
||
| 4881 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4882 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 4883 | } |
||
| 4884 | }; |
||
| 4885 | |||
| 4886 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4887 | // SExtInst Class |
||
| 4888 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4889 | |||
| 4890 | /// This class represents a sign extension of integer types. |
||
| 4891 | class SExtInst : public CastInst { |
||
| 4892 | protected: |
||
| 4893 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 4894 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 4895 | |||
| 4896 | /// Clone an identical SExtInst |
||
| 4897 | SExtInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 4898 | |||
| 4899 | public: |
||
| 4900 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 4901 | SExtInst( |
||
| 4902 | Value *S, ///< The value to be sign extended |
||
| 4903 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to sign extend to |
||
| 4904 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 4905 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 4906 | ); |
||
| 4907 | |||
| 4908 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics |
||
| 4909 | SExtInst( |
||
| 4910 | Value *S, ///< The value to be sign extended |
||
| 4911 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to sign extend to |
||
| 4912 | const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 4913 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into |
||
| 4914 | ); |
||
| 4915 | |||
| 4916 | /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 4917 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 4918 | return I->getOpcode() == SExt; |
||
| 4919 | } |
||
| 4920 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4921 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 4922 | } |
||
| 4923 | }; |
||
| 4924 | |||
| 4925 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4926 | // FPTruncInst Class |
||
| 4927 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4928 | |||
| 4929 | /// This class represents a truncation of floating point types. |
||
| 4930 | class FPTruncInst : public CastInst { |
||
| 4931 | protected: |
||
| 4932 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 4933 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 4934 | |||
| 4935 | /// Clone an identical FPTruncInst |
||
| 4936 | FPTruncInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 4937 | |||
| 4938 | public: |
||
| 4939 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 4940 | FPTruncInst( |
||
| 4941 | Value *S, ///< The value to be truncated |
||
| 4942 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to truncate to |
||
| 4943 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 4944 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 4945 | ); |
||
| 4946 | |||
| 4947 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 4948 | FPTruncInst( |
||
| 4949 | Value *S, ///< The value to be truncated |
||
| 4950 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to truncate to |
||
| 4951 | const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 4952 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into |
||
| 4953 | ); |
||
| 4954 | |||
| 4955 | /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 4956 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 4957 | return I->getOpcode() == FPTrunc; |
||
| 4958 | } |
||
| 4959 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4960 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 4961 | } |
||
| 4962 | }; |
||
| 4963 | |||
| 4964 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4965 | // FPExtInst Class |
||
| 4966 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 4967 | |||
| 4968 | /// This class represents an extension of floating point types. |
||
| 4969 | class FPExtInst : public CastInst { |
||
| 4970 | protected: |
||
| 4971 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 4972 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 4973 | |||
| 4974 | /// Clone an identical FPExtInst |
||
| 4975 | FPExtInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 4976 | |||
| 4977 | public: |
||
| 4978 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 4979 | FPExtInst( |
||
| 4980 | Value *S, ///< The value to be extended |
||
| 4981 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to extend to |
||
| 4982 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 4983 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 4984 | ); |
||
| 4985 | |||
| 4986 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics |
||
| 4987 | FPExtInst( |
||
| 4988 | Value *S, ///< The value to be extended |
||
| 4989 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to extend to |
||
| 4990 | const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 4991 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into |
||
| 4992 | ); |
||
| 4993 | |||
| 4994 | /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 4995 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 4996 | return I->getOpcode() == FPExt; |
||
| 4997 | } |
||
| 4998 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 4999 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 5000 | } |
||
| 5001 | }; |
||
| 5002 | |||
| 5003 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5004 | // UIToFPInst Class |
||
| 5005 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5006 | |||
| 5007 | /// This class represents a cast unsigned integer to floating point. |
||
| 5008 | class UIToFPInst : public CastInst { |
||
| 5009 | protected: |
||
| 5010 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 5011 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 5012 | |||
| 5013 | /// Clone an identical UIToFPInst |
||
| 5014 | UIToFPInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 5015 | |||
| 5016 | public: |
||
| 5017 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 5018 | UIToFPInst( |
||
| 5019 | Value *S, ///< The value to be converted |
||
| 5020 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to |
||
| 5021 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5022 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 5023 | ); |
||
| 5024 | |||
| 5025 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics |
||
| 5026 | UIToFPInst( |
||
| 5027 | Value *S, ///< The value to be converted |
||
| 5028 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to |
||
| 5029 | const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5030 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into |
||
| 5031 | ); |
||
| 5032 | |||
| 5033 | /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 5034 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 5035 | return I->getOpcode() == UIToFP; |
||
| 5036 | } |
||
| 5037 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 5038 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 5039 | } |
||
| 5040 | }; |
||
| 5041 | |||
| 5042 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5043 | // SIToFPInst Class |
||
| 5044 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5045 | |||
| 5046 | /// This class represents a cast from signed integer to floating point. |
||
| 5047 | class SIToFPInst : public CastInst { |
||
| 5048 | protected: |
||
| 5049 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 5050 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 5051 | |||
| 5052 | /// Clone an identical SIToFPInst |
||
| 5053 | SIToFPInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 5054 | |||
| 5055 | public: |
||
| 5056 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 5057 | SIToFPInst( |
||
| 5058 | Value *S, ///< The value to be converted |
||
| 5059 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to |
||
| 5060 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5061 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 5062 | ); |
||
| 5063 | |||
| 5064 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics |
||
| 5065 | SIToFPInst( |
||
| 5066 | Value *S, ///< The value to be converted |
||
| 5067 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to |
||
| 5068 | const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5069 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into |
||
| 5070 | ); |
||
| 5071 | |||
| 5072 | /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 5073 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 5074 | return I->getOpcode() == SIToFP; |
||
| 5075 | } |
||
| 5076 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 5077 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 5078 | } |
||
| 5079 | }; |
||
| 5080 | |||
| 5081 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5082 | // FPToUIInst Class |
||
| 5083 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5084 | |||
| 5085 | /// This class represents a cast from floating point to unsigned integer |
||
| 5086 | class FPToUIInst : public CastInst { |
||
| 5087 | protected: |
||
| 5088 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 5089 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 5090 | |||
| 5091 | /// Clone an identical FPToUIInst |
||
| 5092 | FPToUIInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 5093 | |||
| 5094 | public: |
||
| 5095 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 5096 | FPToUIInst( |
||
| 5097 | Value *S, ///< The value to be converted |
||
| 5098 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to |
||
| 5099 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5100 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 5101 | ); |
||
| 5102 | |||
| 5103 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics |
||
| 5104 | FPToUIInst( |
||
| 5105 | Value *S, ///< The value to be converted |
||
| 5106 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to |
||
| 5107 | const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5108 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 5109 | ); |
||
| 5110 | |||
| 5111 | /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 5112 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 5113 | return I->getOpcode() == FPToUI; |
||
| 5114 | } |
||
| 5115 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 5116 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 5117 | } |
||
| 5118 | }; |
||
| 5119 | |||
| 5120 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5121 | // FPToSIInst Class |
||
| 5122 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5123 | |||
| 5124 | /// This class represents a cast from floating point to signed integer. |
||
| 5125 | class FPToSIInst : public CastInst { |
||
| 5126 | protected: |
||
| 5127 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 5128 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 5129 | |||
| 5130 | /// Clone an identical FPToSIInst |
||
| 5131 | FPToSIInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 5132 | |||
| 5133 | public: |
||
| 5134 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 5135 | FPToSIInst( |
||
| 5136 | Value *S, ///< The value to be converted |
||
| 5137 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to |
||
| 5138 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5139 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 5140 | ); |
||
| 5141 | |||
| 5142 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics |
||
| 5143 | FPToSIInst( |
||
| 5144 | Value *S, ///< The value to be converted |
||
| 5145 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to |
||
| 5146 | const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5147 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into |
||
| 5148 | ); |
||
| 5149 | |||
| 5150 | /// Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 5151 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 5152 | return I->getOpcode() == FPToSI; |
||
| 5153 | } |
||
| 5154 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 5155 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 5156 | } |
||
| 5157 | }; |
||
| 5158 | |||
| 5159 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5160 | // IntToPtrInst Class |
||
| 5161 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5162 | |||
| 5163 | /// This class represents a cast from an integer to a pointer. |
||
| 5164 | class IntToPtrInst : public CastInst { |
||
| 5165 | public: |
||
| 5166 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 5167 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 5168 | |||
| 5169 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 5170 | IntToPtrInst( |
||
| 5171 | Value *S, ///< The value to be converted |
||
| 5172 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to |
||
| 5173 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5174 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 5175 | ); |
||
| 5176 | |||
| 5177 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics |
||
| 5178 | IntToPtrInst( |
||
| 5179 | Value *S, ///< The value to be converted |
||
| 5180 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to |
||
| 5181 | const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5182 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into |
||
| 5183 | ); |
||
| 5184 | |||
| 5185 | /// Clone an identical IntToPtrInst. |
||
| 5186 | IntToPtrInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 5187 | |||
| 5188 | /// Returns the address space of this instruction's pointer type. |
||
| 5189 | unsigned getAddressSpace() const { |
||
| 5190 | return getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); |
||
| 5191 | } |
||
| 5192 | |||
| 5193 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 5194 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 5195 | return I->getOpcode() == IntToPtr; |
||
| 5196 | } |
||
| 5197 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 5198 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 5199 | } |
||
| 5200 | }; |
||
| 5201 | |||
| 5202 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5203 | // PtrToIntInst Class |
||
| 5204 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5205 | |||
| 5206 | /// This class represents a cast from a pointer to an integer. |
||
| 5207 | class PtrToIntInst : public CastInst { |
||
| 5208 | protected: |
||
| 5209 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 5210 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 5211 | |||
| 5212 | /// Clone an identical PtrToIntInst. |
||
| 5213 | PtrToIntInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 5214 | |||
| 5215 | public: |
||
| 5216 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 5217 | PtrToIntInst( |
||
| 5218 | Value *S, ///< The value to be converted |
||
| 5219 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to |
||
| 5220 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5221 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 5222 | ); |
||
| 5223 | |||
| 5224 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics |
||
| 5225 | PtrToIntInst( |
||
| 5226 | Value *S, ///< The value to be converted |
||
| 5227 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to convert to |
||
| 5228 | const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5229 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into |
||
| 5230 | ); |
||
| 5231 | |||
| 5232 | /// Gets the pointer operand. |
||
| 5233 | Value *getPointerOperand() { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 5234 | /// Gets the pointer operand. |
||
| 5235 | const Value *getPointerOperand() const { return getOperand(0); } |
||
| 5236 | /// Gets the operand index of the pointer operand. |
||
| 5237 | static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { return 0U; } |
||
| 5238 | |||
| 5239 | /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand. |
||
| 5240 | unsigned getPointerAddressSpace() const { |
||
| 5241 | return getPointerOperand()->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); |
||
| 5242 | } |
||
| 5243 | |||
| 5244 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 5245 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 5246 | return I->getOpcode() == PtrToInt; |
||
| 5247 | } |
||
| 5248 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 5249 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 5250 | } |
||
| 5251 | }; |
||
| 5252 | |||
| 5253 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5254 | // BitCastInst Class |
||
| 5255 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5256 | |||
| 5257 | /// This class represents a no-op cast from one type to another. |
||
| 5258 | class BitCastInst : public CastInst { |
||
| 5259 | protected: |
||
| 5260 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 5261 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 5262 | |||
| 5263 | /// Clone an identical BitCastInst. |
||
| 5264 | BitCastInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 5265 | |||
| 5266 | public: |
||
| 5267 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 5268 | BitCastInst( |
||
| 5269 | Value *S, ///< The value to be casted |
||
| 5270 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to casted to |
||
| 5271 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5272 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 5273 | ); |
||
| 5274 | |||
| 5275 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics |
||
| 5276 | BitCastInst( |
||
| 5277 | Value *S, ///< The value to be casted |
||
| 5278 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to casted to |
||
| 5279 | const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5280 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into |
||
| 5281 | ); |
||
| 5282 | |||
| 5283 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 5284 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 5285 | return I->getOpcode() == BitCast; |
||
| 5286 | } |
||
| 5287 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 5288 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 5289 | } |
||
| 5290 | }; |
||
| 5291 | |||
| 5292 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5293 | // AddrSpaceCastInst Class |
||
| 5294 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5295 | |||
| 5296 | /// This class represents a conversion between pointers from one address space |
||
| 5297 | /// to another. |
||
| 5298 | class AddrSpaceCastInst : public CastInst { |
||
| 5299 | protected: |
||
| 5300 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 5301 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 5302 | |||
| 5303 | /// Clone an identical AddrSpaceCastInst. |
||
| 5304 | AddrSpaceCastInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 5305 | |||
| 5306 | public: |
||
| 5307 | /// Constructor with insert-before-instruction semantics |
||
| 5308 | AddrSpaceCastInst( |
||
| 5309 | Value *S, ///< The value to be casted |
||
| 5310 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to casted to |
||
| 5311 | const Twine &NameStr = "", ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5312 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr ///< Where to insert the new instruction |
||
| 5313 | ); |
||
| 5314 | |||
| 5315 | /// Constructor with insert-at-end-of-block semantics |
||
| 5316 | AddrSpaceCastInst( |
||
| 5317 | Value *S, ///< The value to be casted |
||
| 5318 | Type *Ty, ///< The type to casted to |
||
| 5319 | const Twine &NameStr, ///< A name for the new instruction |
||
| 5320 | BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd ///< The block to insert the instruction into |
||
| 5321 | ); |
||
| 5322 | |||
| 5323 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 5324 | static bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 5325 | return I->getOpcode() == AddrSpaceCast; |
||
| 5326 | } |
||
| 5327 | static bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 5328 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 5329 | } |
||
| 5330 | |||
| 5331 | /// Gets the pointer operand. |
||
| 5332 | Value *getPointerOperand() { |
||
| 5333 | return getOperand(0); |
||
| 5334 | } |
||
| 5335 | |||
| 5336 | /// Gets the pointer operand. |
||
| 5337 | const Value *getPointerOperand() const { |
||
| 5338 | return getOperand(0); |
||
| 5339 | } |
||
| 5340 | |||
| 5341 | /// Gets the operand index of the pointer operand. |
||
| 5342 | static unsigned getPointerOperandIndex() { |
||
| 5343 | return 0U; |
||
| 5344 | } |
||
| 5345 | |||
| 5346 | /// Returns the address space of the pointer operand. |
||
| 5347 | unsigned getSrcAddressSpace() const { |
||
| 5348 | return getPointerOperand()->getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); |
||
| 5349 | } |
||
| 5350 | |||
| 5351 | /// Returns the address space of the result. |
||
| 5352 | unsigned getDestAddressSpace() const { |
||
| 5353 | return getType()->getPointerAddressSpace(); |
||
| 5354 | } |
||
| 5355 | }; |
||
| 5356 | |||
| 5357 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5358 | // Helper functions |
||
| 5359 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5360 | |||
| 5361 | /// A helper function that returns the pointer operand of a load or store |
||
| 5362 | /// instruction. Returns nullptr if not load or store. |
||
| 5363 | inline const Value *getLoadStorePointerOperand(const Value *V) { |
||
| 5364 | if (auto *Load = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(V)) |
||
| 5365 | return Load->getPointerOperand(); |
||
| 5366 | if (auto *Store = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(V)) |
||
| 5367 | return Store->getPointerOperand(); |
||
| 5368 | return nullptr; |
||
| 5369 | } |
||
| 5370 | inline Value *getLoadStorePointerOperand(Value *V) { |
||
| 5371 | return const_cast<Value *>( |
||
| 5372 | getLoadStorePointerOperand(static_cast<const Value *>(V))); |
||
| 5373 | } |
||
| 5374 | |||
| 5375 | /// A helper function that returns the pointer operand of a load, store |
||
| 5376 | /// or GEP instruction. Returns nullptr if not load, store, or GEP. |
||
| 5377 | inline const Value *getPointerOperand(const Value *V) { |
||
| 5378 | if (auto *Ptr = getLoadStorePointerOperand(V)) |
||
| 5379 | return Ptr; |
||
| 5380 | if (auto *Gep = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(V)) |
||
| 5381 | return Gep->getPointerOperand(); |
||
| 5382 | return nullptr; |
||
| 5383 | } |
||
| 5384 | inline Value *getPointerOperand(Value *V) { |
||
| 5385 | return const_cast<Value *>(getPointerOperand(static_cast<const Value *>(V))); |
||
| 5386 | } |
||
| 5387 | |||
| 5388 | /// A helper function that returns the alignment of load or store instruction. |
||
| 5389 | inline Align getLoadStoreAlignment(Value *I) { |
||
| 5390 | assert((isa<LoadInst>(I) || isa<StoreInst>(I)) && |
||
| 5391 | "Expected Load or Store instruction"); |
||
| 5392 | if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I)) |
||
| 5393 | return LI->getAlign(); |
||
| 5394 | return cast<StoreInst>(I)->getAlign(); |
||
| 5395 | } |
||
| 5396 | |||
| 5397 | /// A helper function that returns the address space of the pointer operand of |
||
| 5398 | /// load or store instruction. |
||
| 5399 | inline unsigned getLoadStoreAddressSpace(Value *I) { |
||
| 5400 | assert((isa<LoadInst>(I) || isa<StoreInst>(I)) && |
||
| 5401 | "Expected Load or Store instruction"); |
||
| 5402 | if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I)) |
||
| 5403 | return LI->getPointerAddressSpace(); |
||
| 5404 | return cast<StoreInst>(I)->getPointerAddressSpace(); |
||
| 5405 | } |
||
| 5406 | |||
| 5407 | /// A helper function that returns the type of a load or store instruction. |
||
| 5408 | inline Type *getLoadStoreType(Value *I) { |
||
| 5409 | assert((isa<LoadInst>(I) || isa<StoreInst>(I)) && |
||
| 5410 | "Expected Load or Store instruction"); |
||
| 5411 | if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I)) |
||
| 5412 | return LI->getType(); |
||
| 5413 | return cast<StoreInst>(I)->getValueOperand()->getType(); |
||
| 5414 | } |
||
| 5415 | |||
| 5416 | /// A helper function that returns an atomic operation's sync scope; returns |
||
| 5417 | /// std::nullopt if it is not an atomic operation. |
||
| 5418 | inline std::optional<SyncScope::ID> getAtomicSyncScopeID(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 5419 | if (!I->isAtomic()) |
||
| 5420 | return std::nullopt; |
||
| 5421 | if (auto *AI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(I)) |
||
| 5422 | return AI->getSyncScopeID(); |
||
| 5423 | if (auto *AI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I)) |
||
| 5424 | return AI->getSyncScopeID(); |
||
| 5425 | if (auto *AI = dyn_cast<FenceInst>(I)) |
||
| 5426 | return AI->getSyncScopeID(); |
||
| 5427 | if (auto *AI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(I)) |
||
| 5428 | return AI->getSyncScopeID(); |
||
| 5429 | if (auto *AI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(I)) |
||
| 5430 | return AI->getSyncScopeID(); |
||
| 5431 | llvm_unreachable("unhandled atomic operation"); |
||
| 5432 | } |
||
| 5433 | |||
| 5434 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5435 | // FreezeInst Class |
||
| 5436 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
||
| 5437 | |||
| 5438 | /// This class represents a freeze function that returns random concrete |
||
| 5439 | /// value if an operand is either a poison value or an undef value |
||
| 5440 | class FreezeInst : public UnaryInstruction { |
||
| 5441 | protected: |
||
| 5442 | // Note: Instruction needs to be a friend here to call cloneImpl. |
||
| 5443 | friend class Instruction; |
||
| 5444 | |||
| 5445 | /// Clone an identical FreezeInst |
||
| 5446 | FreezeInst *cloneImpl() const; |
||
| 5447 | |||
| 5448 | public: |
||
| 5449 | explicit FreezeInst(Value *S, |
||
| 5450 | const Twine &NameStr = "", |
||
| 5451 | Instruction *InsertBefore = nullptr); |
||
| 5452 | FreezeInst(Value *S, const Twine &NameStr, BasicBlock *InsertAtEnd); |
||
| 5453 | |||
| 5454 | // Methods for support type inquiry through isa, cast, and dyn_cast: |
||
| 5455 | static inline bool classof(const Instruction *I) { |
||
| 5456 | return I->getOpcode() == Freeze; |
||
| 5457 | } |
||
| 5458 | static inline bool classof(const Value *V) { |
||
| 5459 | return isa<Instruction>(V) && classof(cast<Instruction>(V)); |
||
| 5460 | } |
||
| 5461 | }; |
||
| 5462 | |||
| 5463 | } // end namespace llvm |
||
| 5464 | |||
| 5465 | #endif // LLVM_IR_INSTRUCTIONS_H |